This page intentionally left blank
District
Laboratory
Practice in
Tropical
Countries
Part 1
Second Edition
Monica Cheesbrough
CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS
Cambridge, New York, Melbourne, Madrid, Cape Town, Singapore, São Paulo
Cambridge University Press
The Edinburgh Building, Cambridge CB2 8RU, UK
First published in print format
ISBN-13 978-0-521-67630-4
ISBN-13 978-0-511-34935-5
© Monica Cheesbrough 1998, 2005, 2009
Every effort has been made in preparing this book to provide accurate and up-to-
date information which is in accord with accepted standards and practice at the
time of publication. Nevertheless, the authors, editors and publisher can make no
warranties that the information contained herein is totally free from error, not least
b
ecause clinical standards are constantly changing through research and
regulation. The authors, editors and publisher therefore disclaim all liability for
direct or consequential damages resulting from the use of material contained in
this book. Readers are strongly advised to pay careful attention to information
provided by the manufacturer of any drugs or equipment that they plan to use.
2005
Information on this title: www.cambrid
g
e.or
g
/9780521676304
This publication is in copyright. Subject to statutory exception and to the
provision of relevant collective licensing agreements, no reproduction of any part
may take place without the written permission of Cambridge University Press.
Cambridge University Press has no responsibility for the persistence or accuracy
of urls for external or third-party internet websites referred to in this publication,
and does not guarantee that any content on such websites is, or will remain,
accurate or appropriate.
Published in the United States of America by Cambridge University Press, New York
www.cambridge.org
eBook
(
NetLibrar
y)
p
a
p
erback
iii
Part I
Contents
Chapter 1 Organization and staffing of district laboratory services
1.1 Importance of laboratory practice in district health care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 1 3
1.2 Structuring of a district laboratory network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 9
1.3 Training and continuing education of district laboratory personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
1.4 Code of conduct for laboratory personnel and status of medical laboratory practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 12
Chapter 2 Total quality management of district laboratory services
2.1 Ensuring a reliable and quality laboratory service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420
2.2 Selection of tests and interpretation of test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2028
2.3 Financing district laboratory services and controlling costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2831
2.4 Quality assurance and sources of error in district laboratory practice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3137
2.5 SIUnits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3740
2.6 Guidelines for preparing stains and reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4047
2.7 Communicating effectively. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4748
Chapter 3 Health and safety in district laboratories
3.1 Implementing a laboratory health and safety programme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5056
3.2 Safe laboratory premise and personal safety measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5659
3.3 Microbial hazards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5966
3.4 Decontamination of infectious material and disposal of laboratory waste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6674
3.5 Chemical and reagent hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7587
3.6 Equipment and glassware hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8789
3.7 Fire safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8991
3.8 Emergency First Aid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 95
Chapter 4 Equipping district laboratories
4.1 Selection, procurement and care of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 103
4.2 Power supplies in district laboratories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103108
4.3 Microscope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 126
4.4 Equipment for purifying water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 131
4.5 Equipment for weighing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 133
4.6 Equipment for pipetting and dispensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134138
4.7 Centrifuges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 143
4.8 Laboratory autoclave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143148
4.9 Incubator, water bath, heat block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 152
4.10 Colorimeter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152157
4.11 Mixers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158160
4.12 General laboratory-ware for district laboratories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 175
Chapter 5 Parasitological tests
5.1 Parasitology in district laboratories and quality assurance of tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178183
5.2 Features and classification of parasites of medical importance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183191
5.3 Direct examination of faeces and concentration techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191200
5.4 Identification of faecal protozoan trophozoites, cysts and oocysts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200208
5.5 Identification of helminth eggs and larvae found in fae ces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209235
5.6 Examination of urine for Schistosoma haematobium eggs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236239
5.7 Examination of blood for malaria parasites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239258
5.8 Examination of blood, lymph fluid, and c.s.f for trypanosomes causing African trypanosomiasis. . . . . . . 259266
5.9 Examination of blood for Trypanosoma cruzi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266271
5.10 Examination of specimens for Leishmaniaparasites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271279
5.11 Examination of blood for microfilariae in lymphatic filariasis and loiasis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 291
5.12 Examination of skin for Onchocerca volvulusmicrofilariae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291295
5.13 Examination of sputum for Paragonimuseggs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295297
5.14 Less frequently needed tests:
1 Investigation of amoebic liver abscess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298299
2 Investigation of primary amoebic meningoencephalitis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299300
3 Diagnosis of toxoplasmosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300302
4 Diagnosis of hydatid disease. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302304
5 Examination of muscle tissue for Trichinella spiralis larvae. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304305
6 Detection of Dracunculus medinensis (Guinea worm) larvae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305306
Chapter 6 Clinical chemistry tests
6.1 Clinical chemistry in district laboratories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310313
6.2 Quality assurance of clinical chemistry tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313333
6.3 Measurement of serum or plasma creatinine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333337
6.4 Measurement of serum or plasma urea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337340
6.5 Measurement of blood or plasma glucose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340349
6.6 Measurement of serum or plasma bilirubin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349355
6.7 Measurement of serum albumin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355358
6.8 Measurement of serum or plasma alanine aminotransferase (ALT) activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358361
6.9 Measurement of serum or plasma alpha amylase activity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360364
6.10 Measurement of sodium and potassium in serum or plasma. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364369
6.11 Urine tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369385
6.12 Cerebrospinal fluid (c.s.f) tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386389
6.13 Faec al tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389392
Appendix I
Preparation of reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398412
Appendix II
Useful addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414420
Appendix III
Useful charts and figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425428
Supplement
Planning a training curriculum for district laboratory personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430435
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437454
iv
Preface
Since the publication of the first edition of Part 1 District Laboratory Practice in Tropical Countries the
essential role of the laboratory in providing a scientific foundation for district health care and improving the
quality of health care to communities, has not changed. The new challenges faced by health authorities
however, have led to changes in laboratory practice and a greater emphasis on the need for reliable well
managed district laboratories and their rational use in district health care.
In deciding the changes to be incorporated in the new edition of Part 1, the author and those who have
helped with the revision have been guided by the views and requests of those using the book in their work
and training programmes. The important chapters covering management, quality assurance, health and safety
and equipping of district laboratories have been reviewed and updated where needed. For those with internet
access and e-mail facilities, the details of equipment manufacturers now include website information and
e-mail addresses.
Information on parasitic diseases and their control has been brought up to date. Current knowledge on HIV
interaction with parasitic pathogens and new technologies to diagnose parasitic infections have been included.
Immunochromatographic tests to diagnose malaria have been described, their limitations discussed, and
information on the WHO malaria rapid diagnostic tests website included. Other parasite-related websites and
a list of up to date references and recommended reading are given at the end of the parasitology chapter.
Within the clinical chemistry chapter, the text covering diabetes mellitus has been revized to include the
current WHO classification of diabetes and guidelines for diabetes diagnosis. Urine strip tests have also been
updated. To assist in monitoring HIV/AIDS patients for toxicity to antiretroviral drugs, a colorimetric test kit to
measure alanine aminotransferase (ALT) has been included where it is not possible to refer specimens for
testing to a regional clinical chemistry laboratory. Information is also given for a colorimetric creatinine test kit.
For many laboratory programmes, the introduction of standard operating procedures for laboratory tests
backed by quality assessment schemes has been key to improving the reliability, efficiency and accountability
of district laboratory services, motivating laboratory staff and increasing the confidence of laboratory users.
Safe laboratory practices now followed in many laboratories have reduced work-related accidents and
laboratory-acquired infections. It is hoped that the new edition of Part 1 will continue to help those involved
in training and those working in district laboratories, often in difficult situations. It is also hoped that it will
encourage health authorities to provide the resources needed to provide a quality laboratory service to the
community.
Monica Cheesbrough May 2005
v
Acknowledgements
Special thanks are due to all those working in laboratories in tropical and developing countries and those
involved in training laboratory personnel who have corresponded and contributed their suggestions for this
second edition of Part 1 District Laboratory Practice in Tropical Countries.
Gratitude is expressed to all those who have helped to prepare the new edition:
Mr Malcolm Guy, formerly Scientific Administrator MRC Laboratory in the Gambia, for reading through and
commenting on chapters covering the organization, management, safe working practices and equipping of
district laboratories.
Mr John Williams, Clinical Scientist, Department of Infectious and Tropical Diseases, London School of
Hygiene and Tropical Medicine, for helping to update the parasitology chapter.
Mr Anthony Moody, previously Laboratory Manager, Hospital for Tropical Diseases, London, for also assist-
ing in the revision of the parasitology chapter and for contributing text on rapid malaria diagnostic tests.
Professor Claus C Heuck, University Hospital, Duesseldorf, formerly of the World Health Organization Health
Laboratory Technology Unit, for reading through and making suggestions for the clinical chemistry chapter.
Mr Robert Simpson, Laboratory Manager, Chemical Pathology, St Thomas Hospital, London, for also assist-
ing in the revision of the clinical chemistry chapter.
Gratitude is also expressed to Dr Geoffrey V Gill, Reader in Tropical Medicine, Liverpool School of Tropical
Medicine, for updating the diabetes mellitus text.
Thanks are also due to Dr Peter Hill for commenting on quality assurance in clinical chemistry. The help of
Mr Ray J Wood, Laboratory Manager Mengo Hospital, Uganda, is also acknowledged.
The author wishes to thank Fakenham Photosetting for their careful and professional preparation of the new
edition.
Acknowledgements for colour artwork: These can be found on page 177 before Chapter 5 Parasitological
Tests.
vi
1
Organization and staffing of district
laboratory services
ORGANIZATION AND STAFFING OF DISTRICT LABORATORY SERVICES 1
1.1
1.1 Importance of laboratory
practice in district health care
District laboratory services have an essential role in
the surveillance, prevention, control, diagnosis and
management of diseases of greatest public health
importance. In discussing the role of laboratories at
district level, the World Health Organization com-
ments that with the scaling up of interventions
against HIV/AIDS, tuberculosis and malaria, the
need for diagnostic and laboratory services has
never been greater.
1
Meaning of district as used in this manual
The district is designated by the World Health Organization
as the key level for the management, growth and consoli-
dation of primary health care (PHC). It is the most
peripheral unit of local government and administration that
has comprehensive powers and responsibilities.
A typical rural district health system consists of:
A network of PHC facilities, including village
health clinics, maternity centres, health centres
and small urban clinics. Mobile health units may
also provide some outreach PHC services and
support for home-based health care.
A system for the referral of seriously ill patients
needing specialist care.
The district hospital (first referral hospital).
Other government health related departments,
including social and rehabilitative services,
environmental health, nutrition, agriculture,
water supply and sanitation.
Non-government health sector organizations
working in the district.
A district health system is usually administered by a
district health management team or health council,
consisting of representatives from the community,
PHC and hospital services, and health related
departments such as water and sanitation.
The growth of district health systems has led to:
– essential health services and health decisions
being brought closer to where people live and
work.
communities becoming more aware of health
issues and demanding health services that are
relevant, accessible, reliable, affordable, and
accountable.
district health councils being formed to identify
and assess community health care needs,
develop and manage local health services, and
ensure district health resources are used
effectively, efficiently and equitably.
Plate 1.1 Typical community-based district hospital in Kenya.
Plate 1.2 Health centre in Vietnam.
Courtesy: RP Marchand, MCNV.
WHY THE LABORATORYIS NEEDED IN DISTRICT
HEALTHCAR E
The laboratory has an important role in improving
the:
quality,
efficiency,
cost-effectiveness,
planning and management of district health care.
What difference can the laboratory make to
the quality of district health care?
Laboratory investigations increase the accuracy of
disease diagnosis
Many infectious diseases and serious illnesses can
only be diagnosed reliably by using the laboratory.
For example, errors in the diagnosis of malaria have
been shown to be particularly high when diagnosis
is based on clinical symptoms alone.
Misdiagnosis or late diagnosis can lead to:
incorrect treatment with misuse and waste of
drugs.
increased morbidity and mortality.
hospitalization and need for specialist care.
patient dissatisfaction leading to negative
responses to future health interventions.
underutilization of health facilities.
– lack of confidence and motivation of health
personnel.
increased risk to the community from inappro-
priate disease management and untreated
infectious disease.
The laboratory has an essential role in screening
for ill health and assessing response to treatment
At district level the laboratory is needed to:
assess a patient’s response to drug therapy.
assist in monitoring the condition of a patient
and help to decide when it may be necessary to
refer for specialist care.
screen pregnant women for anaemia, protein-
uria, and infections which if not treated may
cause disease in the newborn, premature birth,
low birth weight, or significant maternal illness.
screen the contacts of persons with infectious
diseases such as tuberculosis and sexually trans-
mitted diseases.
detect inherited abnormalities such as haemo-
globin S as part of district family planning health
services.
– screen whole blood and blood products for
transfusion transmitted pathogens.
The laboratory is needed to work with others in
reducing infection in the community and investi-
gating epidemics rapidly
The public health functions of a district health
laboratory service include:
detecting the source(s) of infection, identifying
carriers, and contact tracing.
participating in epidemiological surveys.
assisting in disease surveillance and in the selec-
tion, application, and evaluation of control
methods.
helping to control hospital acquired infections.
participating in health education.
examining designated community water supplies
for indicators of faecal and chemical pollution.
responding rapidly when an epidemic occurs,
including appropriate on-site testing and the
collection and despatch of specimens to the
Regional or Central Microbiology Laboratory for
pathogen identification.
In what ways can the laboratory contribute to
achieving efficiency and cost effectiveness in
district health care?
The laboratory can help to reduce expenditure on
drugs
When the laboratory is used to improve the accu-
racy of diagnosis, perform appropriate antimicrobial
susceptibility testing, and monitor a patient’s
response to treatment:
drugs can be used more selectively and only
when needed.
patterns of emerging drug resistance can be
identified more rapidly and monitored.
The laboratory can lower health care costs by
identifying disease at an early stage
Early successful treatment following early correct
laboratory diagnosis can help to:
reduce the number of times a patient may need
to seek medical care for the same illness.
– prevent complications arising from advanced
untreated disease.
avoid hospitalization and further costly investi-
gations.
Significant savings can be made when the labora-
tory participates in local disease surveillance and
control
This is because:
2 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
1.1
the spread of infectious disease can be contained
more rapidly.
disease control measures can be selected and
targeted more effectively.
sources of infection and disease carriers can be
identified.
What information can the laboratory provide
to achieve rational health planning and good
health management?
Reliable laboratory test results with relevant
patient data, provide information on the health
status of a community, health patterns, and
disease trends
This information is needed to establish health care
priorities and plan:
health care programmes and location of health
facilities.
training of district health personnel and delivery
of health services.
treatment schedules and changes in drug usage.
financing of district health care programmes.
Public health laboratory activities provide accurate
epidemiological information for health planning
This information can help to determine:
causes of ill health in the community and risk
factors contributing to the presence and spread
of diseases.
– prevalence and incidence rates of important
infectious diseases.
effectiveness of health care programmes, drug
treatments, and immunization programmes.
which methods have appropriate sensitivity and
specificity to be useful.
Further information: Readers are referred to the paper of
Mundy et al: The operation, quality and costs of a district
laboratory service in Malawi.
2
1. 2 Structuring of a district
laboratory network
A district laboratory service must be integrated in
the health system which exists within its district if it
is to function as a network, be accessible, and pro-
vide a service that is needed by the community and
those managing health care in the district.
An example of a laboratory service that has been
integrated in a rural district health system is shown
in Fig. 1.1. The district laboratory service network
consists of:
Outreach community-based laboratory facilities
located in:
comprehensive health centres, st affed by
laboratory personnel and able to perform a
range of microscopical investigations and
other basic tests to assist in the diagnosis,
assessment, treatment and prevention of
common diseases.
maternity health units, with nursing st aff
ORGANIZATION AND STAFFING OF DISTRICT LABORATORY SERVICES 3
1.1–1.2
SUMMARY
Laboratory practice in district health care
District laboratories form an integral part of
good health care planning and delivery.
Reliable, integrated, and well managed
district laboratory services are essential if:
an accept able quality of community
health care and district health manage-
ment are to be achieved and sustained.
illness and premature death are to b e
reduced.
the community is to have confidence in
its health services.
Unless the importance of the laboratory in
generating valid and objective health data is
recognized:
district health programmes will b e
unable to respond adequately to local
health care needs and priorities.
sc arce health resources are likely to be
wasted on other less effective interven-
tions.
national health planning will lack a
scientific foundation on which to
developand evaluate itshealth strategies.
Fordistrict laboratories to operate effectively,
district health authorities must allocate the
correct proportion of available resources to:
district lab oratory practice.
training and continuing e ducation of
district laboratory personnel.
instructing district me dical officers and
community health workers in the
correct and optimum use of laboratory
services.
screening for anaemia and proteinuria and
collecting blood for appropriate antibody
screening in the district hospital laboratory.
District hospital laboratory with facilities to service
the clinical, epidemiological, and training
requirements of a first referral hospital.
Specimen collection and transport system to
enable:
patients attending health centres to b enefit
from the facilities of the district hospital lab-
oratory.
epidemics to b e investigated rapidly.
Mobile laboratory work as required by district
health needs.
4 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
1.2
Fig. 1.1 Laboratory service network
CENTRAL
Hospital Laboratory
Public Health Laboratory
Specialist Laboratory Units
REGIONAL/PROVINCIAL
Hospital Laboratory
More clinical and public health
laboratory facilities
DISTRICT LABORATORY SERVICES
District
Hospital
Laboratory
Outreach
laboratories
in
Health centres
Maternity health
units
meet the health needs of individuals and the
community.
operate in an acceptable way.
be accessible to the community and affordable.
be reliable and sustainable.
Health centres with laboratory facilities are generally
better attended and more highly valued by the com-
munity because laboratory testing can often be seen
to establish the true cause of an illness, enabling
correct treatment to be prescribed at a patient’s first
attendance.
Establishing a health centre laboratory
When deciding whether to site a laboratory in a
health centre the following are important consider-
ations:
What is likely to be the affect on morbidity and
mortality in the area if essential laboratory facili-
ties were to be made available. How will the
results of tests be used?
Is the health centre sufficiently well attended and
what is likely to be the demand for laboratory
tests?
Is it possible to train local community health
workers to use laboratory facilities correctly, par-
ticularly in early diagnoses, follow-up, care, and
local disease surveillance?
Note:Written Guidelines on the Use of the Laboratory in
PHCmust be provided for community health workers by
the district medical officer. Included in the Guidelines
shouldbe when to order particular tests, type of specimen
required,interpretation of testresults and appropriate fol-
low-up.Health workers should know the relative costs of
testsand average time it takes to perform individual tests.
Is there a person trained or can be trained to per-
form the required tests competently and manage
safely and efficiently a health centre laboratory?
Can the necessary measures be taken to ensure
the safe collection, transport and disposal of
specimens?
Is it possible for the health centre laboratory to
be visited regularly by the district laboratory
coordinator or a senior person from the district
hospital laboratory?
Important:At no time should a laboratory be established
in a health centre unless it can be visited regularly and the
work controlled adequately.
Is it possible to organize a reliable system for sup-
plying the laboratory with reagents and other
essential supplies?
Is the cost of running the laboratory affordable,
including the cost of supplies, maintaining equip-
COMMUNITY-BASEDLABORATORY FACILITIES
A reliable community-based laboratory service is
one of the most important ways of improving the
quality of PHC and avoiding patients and pregnant
women having to travel to the district hospital for
essential laboratory tests. To be effective in PHC,
community-based laboratory practice must:
ment, and staff salaries? How will laboratory
expenditures be met?
Can the health centre provide adequate facilities
for a laboratory to operate effectively and safely,
i.e. can a room be provided that is:
structurally sound with se cure door(s), and
burglar proof, insect screened windows that
provide adequate light and ventilation.
sufficiently large to b e sub-divided into areas
for working, reception of patients and speci-
mens, keeping records, decontamination of
infected material and cleaning of laboratory-
ware.
provide d with running water.
provide d with separate sinks for cleaning
laboratory-ware and hand-washing.
fitte d with facilities for the safe disposal of
specimens.
wire d for mains electricity or if unavailable,
supplied with an alternative source of power,
e.g. battery, rechargeable from a solar panel.
fitte d with appropriate washable working
surfaces, seating for patients and staff, secure
storage cupboards, and shelving.
Staffing a health centre laboratory
A laboratory in a community health centre will
usually be staffed by a laboratory worker or a local
community health worker trained to examine speci-
mens microscopically, perform appropriate diagnos-
tic and screening tests, collect and refer specimens
for specialist tests, and participate in community
health education and disease surveillance.
Depending on the workload of the health centre,
one or two laboratory aides may also be required.
Activities of a health centre laboratory
To investigate by referral or testing on site, im-
portant diseases and health problems affecting
the local community. Depending on geographi-
cal area such investigations will usually include:
Bacterial and viral infections: Tuberculosis, lep-
rosy, meningitis, cholera, gonorrhoea, syphilis,
vaginitis, urinary tract infections, respiratory tract
infections, bacillary dysentery, and relapsing
fever. In the more comprehensive health centres
staffed by a laboratory technical officer, it may
also be possible to investigate HIV disease and
associated infections.
Parasitic diseases: Malaria, schistosomiasis, lym-
phatic filariasis, loiasis, onchocerciasis, African
trypanosomiasis, Chagas’ disease, leishmaniasis,
amoebic dysentery, giardiasis, strongyloidiasis,
trichuriasis, hookworm disease, and any other
locally important parasitic diseases.
Other causes of ill health: Including anaemia, dia-
betes, renal disease, and skin mycoses.
To assist the health worker in deciding the
severity of a patient’s condition and prognosis.
To collect and refer specimens for testing to the
district laboratory, including:
drinking water s amples from sources used
by the community.
fae cal specimens for the microbiological
investigation of major enteric pathogens.
serum for antib ody tests to investigate
important communicable diseases.
spe cimens for biochemical testing to investi-
gate disorders of the liver and kidney,
metabolic and deficiency diseases.
spe cimens for culture and antimicrobial sen-
sitivity testing to diagnose important bac-
terial infections and monitor drug resistance.
To notify the district hospital laboratory at an
early stage of any result of public health import-
ance and send specimens for confirmatory tests.
To screen pregnant women for anaemia,
proteinuria and malaria, and refer serum to the
district hospital laboratory for antibody screening
of sexually transmitted diseases such as syphilis.
To promote health care and assist in community
health education, e.g. by demonstrating micro-
scopically parasites of public health importance.
To keep careful records which can be used by
health authorities in health planning.
To keep an inventory of stock and order reagents
and other supplies in good time..
To send an informative monthly report to the
district hospital laboratory of the work carried out
and results obtained.
Screening for proteinuria and anaemia in
maternity health centres
All health units providing antenatal care should be
able to test for proteinuria and anaemia. Laboratory
staff from the district hospital should train health
workers how to collect specimens correctly and how
to perform and control the required tests. Maternity
centres should be provided with standardized
reagents and specimen containers.
A reliable system is also needed for transporting
venousblood collected from antenatal women to the
district hospital laboratory for appropriate testing.
ORGANIZATION AND STAFFING OF DISTRICT LABORATORY SERVICES 5
1.2
DISTRICT HOSPITALLABORATORY
The important functions of a district health system
can be found in the 3rd edition, Principles of
Medicine in Africa.
3
Depending on the area served by the district
hospital, number of hospital beds, and workload of
the laboratory, the district hospital laboratory may
consist of a number of connecting laboratory units
or a subdivided laboratory room.
4,5
Staff
A district hospital laboratory is usually staffed by at
least one experienced laboratory officer and de-
pending on workload, by two to four assistants and
several aides. Ideally the district laboratory coordina-
tor and tutor in charge of training should be based
at the district hospital.
Note: The training of district laboratory personnel is
described in subunit 1.3. The responsibilities of the
district laboratory coordinator and involvement of
the medical staff in district laboratory services are
discussed in subunit 2.1.
Activities of a district hospital laboratory
In consultation with the district health manage-
ment team, public health officers, and clinical
staff, to decide which laboratory tests are needed
and can be performed at district level (see sub-
unit 2.2).
With the district laboratory coordinator, to man-
age effectively the district laboratory network as
explained in subunit 2.1.
To prepare and implement standard operating
procedures for all district laboratory activities (see
subunit 2.4).
To support the work of the outreach laboratories
by:
testing spe cimens referred from community
health centres and maternity health units
and returning test results speedily.
confirming a test result that indic ates serious
illness or is of major public health import-
ance.
supplying st andardized reagents, controls,
stains, specimen containers, stationery and
other essential laboratory supplies.
che cking the performance of equipment.
implementing and monitoring s afe working
practices.
visiting each outreach lab oratory every three
months (role of the district laboratory coordi-
nator) to assist staff and monitor work per-
formance and quality of laboratory reports.
training health centre lab oratory personnel
and arranging supervision and continuing
training in the work place.
organizing a district external quality assess-
ment scheme as described in subunit 2.4.
To refer specimens to the regional laboratory that
cannot be tested locally or are more economically
batch-tested at regional level. Also, to notify the
regional Public Health Laboratory of any result of
public health importance and to send specimens
for confirmatory testing.
To participate in external quality assurance pro-
grammes organized by the regional or central
laboratory.
To keep accurate records and send a report
every three months to the district management
team and director of the regional laboratory,
detailing the activities of the district laboratory
network, together with suggestions for managing
problems and improving the laboratory service
to the community.
DISTRICT SPECIMEN COLLECTION AND TRANSPORT
SERVICE
An efficient laboratory specimen collection and
transport service from the community health centres
with a reliable and prompt return of test results, is an
important way of extending laboratory facilities
throughout the district with the following benefits:
– improved treatment and follow-up care of
patients in the community and better health care
of pregnant women.
confirmation and further investigation of patients
with important abnormal test results.
more reliable information on health trends and
the causes of disease in the district.
– more rapid investigation and control of
epidemics.
opportunities for detecting the emergence of
drug resistance and monitoring its spread in the
community.
Requirements of a specimen referral system
A specimen referral system will function reliably
providing:
There is close communication between staff of
6 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
1.2
the community-based health facilities and the
district hospital laboratory.
Outreach laboratories are supplied with speci-
men containers and laboratory request forms.
Community health workers and district labora-
tory personnel are trained in the correct collec-
tion, preservation, and despatch of specimens.
Correctly completed documentation accompa-
nies all specimens, and careful records are kept
of referred specimens and test reports.
There is a reliable and secure means of trans-
porting specimens throughout the year and
returning test results with the minimum of delay.
MOBILE DISTRICT LABORATORYWORK
Basic mobile laboratory services may be required in
district health care for the following reasons:
– to support mobile community health pro-
grammes usually in areas where communities
are nomadic or sparsely distributed.
to investigate outbreaks of serious disease and
identify high risk factors.
to work with specialist teams to assess the effec-
tiveness of disease control interventions, check
the efficacy of immunization programmes, and
obtain epidemiological data.
– to assist medical teams in emergencies and
disaster situations.
to provide back-up for health education and the
promotion of health activities in the district.
– to monitor community water supplies for
pollution.
Mobile laboratory work must be well planned and
organized. Most of the difficulties and poor per-
formance associated with mobile laboratory work
are due to:
using inappropriate technologies,
– equipment that is not sufficiently rugged or
designed for field use,
reagents that have deteriorated due to heat, high
relative humidity or incorrect storage,
– bypassing quality control proce dures because
they are too time-consuming or difficult to apply
under field situations.
Problems of safety arise when specimens are col-
lected and transported in unsuitable and leaky con-
tainers, handled without due care, or disposed of
unsafely. Accidents tend to occur more frequently
under field conditions due to cramped, unfamiliar or
noisy working conditions, unsafe pipetting, limited
facilities for handwashing, tiredness, pressure to
work rapidly, and lack of supervision.
The cost of mobile laboratory work can be high
because in addition to transport costs, heat-sensitive
reagents deteriorate more rapidly, equipment needs
to be repaired more often, and extra controls are
needed in field work. The travelling time of staff
needs also to be considered.
Recommendations for mobile district
laboratory work
Establish the reasons and objectives for under-
taking mobile laboratory work and the anticip-
ated extent of it. Discuss the data required and
how it should be obtained and recorded.
Assess whether full field-testing is necessary or
whether specimens can be collected, stabilized,
and brought back to the district hospital labora-
tory for testing under more controlled conditions.
Obtain in advance as much information as poss-
ible about travelling time and conditions, the
community and its customs, location of the work,
electricity supplies, water availability and quality.
Select technologies and instrumentation of
proven reliability and acceptability in the field. If
this cannot be established, pretest the techniques
and equipment under simulated field conditions.
Decide how to check the performance of instru-
ments and test for reagent deterioration under
field conditions.
Make a detailed check list of every item needed
and quantity of each required. Prepare rugged
containers for transporting the mobile laboratory,
including insulated containers for storing heat
sensitive reagents, controls, and specimens.
Discuss in advance the tasks that each member
of the mobile laboratory team will perform and
measures to be taken to ensure quality and
safety.
Monitor the cost, information provided, benefits
to the community and performance character-
istics of any on-going mobile laboratory work.
Note: Further information on mobile laboratory
work can be found in the WHO publication Health
laboratory facilities in emergency and disaster
situations.
6
ORGANIZATION AND STAFFING OF DISTRICT LABORATORY SERVICES 7
1.2
8 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
1.2
PUBLIC HEALTH
Diagnosis
More accurate with fewer
misdiagnoses.
Earlier diagnosis.
Treatment
Correct treatment with drugs
used selectively.
Less over-prescribing.
Side effects and progress
monitored.
Assessment/screening
Is referral required?
Pregnant women screened
for illhealth.
Donor blood screened for
pathogens.
Epidemics
Earlier pathogen
identification.
Earlier containment.
Surveillance/control
More effective.
Disease carriers identified.
Contacts traced.
Water supplies tested.
Health information
Causes of disease.
Sources of infection.
Risk factors.
Prevalence and incidence
rates.
PATIENT CARE
Improvement in the quality of care with:
– acute illness more rapidly diagnosed,
– less preventable advanced/chronic illness,
– reduced mortality.
Reduced transmission of infectious diseases.
Lower expenditure on drugs.
More efficient use of health resources.
Better health planning and management.
Greater patient satisfaction.
Greater motivation of health workers.
OUTCOME
DISTRICT
LABORATORY
PRACTICE
Fig. 1.2 Role of the laboratory in district health care.
ORGANIZATION AND STAFFING OF DISTRICT LABORATORY SERVICES 9
1.2
1 District hospital laboratory officer.
Acknowledgements:Plate 2: Courtesy TALC, Plates 4,5, 6: Courtesy Warren L Johns, Plate 3:Courtesy Graham Mortimer.
2 Urinary schistosomiasis survey.
4 Staining for AFB in refugee camp.
3 Examining malaria smears in a
health centre.
5 Screening for anaemia in refugee camp.
6 Mobile laboratory work in Peru.
1. 3 Training and continuing
education of district laboratory
personnel
In most developing countries the training of medical
laboratory personnel is changing in response to:
The need for more appropriately trained district
laboratory staff to support community-based
health care.
The need for improved quality, safety, efficiency
and management in district laboratory practice to
optimize the use of health resources.
The need for relevant, better planned, indige-
nous training programmes with educational
objectives that define clearly what trainees need
to learn to become competent district laboratory
officers.
The need for continuing on-site training and
education to retain competency and motivation.
A job related approach to the training and continu-
ing education of laboratory personnel is essential if
district laboratories are to provide a service that is
reliable, cost-effective, efficient, and relevant.
Inappropriate or inadequate training of laboratory
personnel is not only wasteful but also potentially
dangerous.
The following are some of the indicators of poor
training of laboratory personnel:
8
increase in the number of wrong test results.
delays in issuing reports or loss of reports.
frequent and serious complaints from those re-
questing laboratory tests and an increase in
requests for repeat tests as confidence decreases.
increase in the damage to equipment.
increase in the contamination of reagents and
materials and in the amounts of reagents used.
greater incidence of laboratory-acquired infec-
tions and other laboratory-related accidents.
poorly motivated staff and job dissatisfaction.
more time needed to supervize new staff.
increase in laboratory operating costs.
Agood learner-centred training programmewill help
studentsto learn the right facts, skills,and attitudes in
an efficient andinte grated way.It will assess whether
students have learned the right things and help
students to put intopractice what they have learned.
The training programme should allow sufficient time
10 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
1.3
both for learning and assessment. Students and
tutors need to be assured of progress during train-
ing. Becoming aware of learning problems or teach-
ing inadequacies at the end of training is too late.
J
OB RELATEDTRAINING CURRICULUM FOR DISTRICT
LABORATORYPERSONNEL
A job related training programme is usually referred
to as competency-based or task-orientated and is
recommended for the basic training of medical lab-
oratory personnel. It is ideally suited to the training
of district laboratory officers in developing countries
because it ensures the training is indigenous and rel-
evant to the working situation. It fits a person to do
the job that is needed, where it is needed, and to
take on the responsibilities that go with the job.
The better a person can do their job the greater will
be their effectiveness and satisfaction. Competency
and job satisfaction are major factors in achieving
and retaining quality of service.
How to design a curriculum for district labora-
tory personnel
Information on how to design and implement a job-
related, i.e. competency-based, training programme
can be found in a SUPPLEMENT at the b ack of this
book, see pages 430–435.
Teaching students
7
The purpose of a training programme is to
teach students to do a job.
Teachers should concentrate on essential
facts, skills, and attitudes. It is neither
possible nor desirable to teach everything.
Teachers should base their teaching on the
health problems of the community and on
the work their students will be expected to
do.
Teachers should plan courses and lessons
using situation analysis and task analysis
(see Supplement, Training curriculum
for district laboratory personnel, pages
430–435.
Important: If students can do their job com-
petently at the end of their training, the course
has been successful. If students cannot do the
work they have been trained for, then the
course has failed.
CONTINUINGEDUCATIONOF DISTRICTLABORATORY
STAFF
Continuing professional education with support in
the workplace are required to retain the competence
and motivation of district laboratory staff and pre-
vent a decline in working standards. It is also an
effective way of promoting job satisfaction and
personal development.
Practising laboratory officers have a professional
responsibility to participate in continuing education.
Continuing professional education is also necessary
for the successful introduction of new technologies
and the implementation of changes in standard
operating procedures.
Continuing education and updating of district
laboratory staff is best provided on-site by the district
laboratory coordinator during regular visits (see sub-
unit 2.1). On-going training in the workplace is also
one of the most effective ways of upgrading the
knowledge, attitudes, technical and management
skills of a laboratory worker who may have received
only a semi-formal training some years before. Use
of continuing education in this situation is often
referred to as ‘closing the performance gap.’
Value of Newsletters
A further way of promoting continued professional
development at district level is to circulate a simple
District Laboratory Newsletter which has an edu-
cation section contributed by qualified laboratory
personnel and district medical officers. Laboratory
workers should be encouraged to stimulate dis-
cussion about their work. Such a Newsletter could
also circulate information about new advances in
laboratory practice relevant to community health
care and disease control.
For those countries with a Medical Laboratory
Association, laboratory personnel will usually be able
to continue their professional education through
their Association’s journal/newsletter and by attend-
ing refresher courses, seminars, and professional
meetings organized by their Association.
Upgrading and career development
For all laboratory personnel there should be oppor-
tunities for upgrading and career development
according to an individual’s abilities, participation in
continuing education, work responsibilities, and the
staffing needs and structure of the indigenous
laboratory service.
Staffing of a laboratory service must be based on
national health needs, organization of national
health services, and finance available for operating
the service and staff salaries.
The career structure should be flexible to allow
for future development. Career prospects should be
sufficiently attractive to discourage trained district
laboratory personnel leaving the health service and
laboratory profession.
Note: The employment of district laboratory staff,
contracts of employment, and supervision of newly
appointed staff are discusssed in subunit 2.1
Ensuring a reliable and quality laboratory service.
1. 4 Code of conduct for
laboratory personnel and status
of medical laboratory practice
A Code of Professional Conduct for Medical
Laboratory Personnel should include those practices
and attitudes which characterize a professional and
responsible laboratory officer and are necessary to
ensure a person works to recognized standards
which patients and those requesting laboratory
investigationscan expect toreceive. It alsoemphasizes
the professional status of medical laboratory
practice.
Adopting a Code of Professional Conduct helps
to remind district laboratory personnel of their
responsibilitiesto patients,duty to upholdprofessional
standards, andneed to work with complete integrity.
Note: A suggested Code of Professional Conduct for
medical laboratory personnel is shown on p. 12.
STATUSOF MEDICAL LABORATORY PRACTICE
Recognition by health authorities of the importance
of medical laboratories in health care programmes is
key to the development and adequate resourcing of
laboratory practice and to laboratory services
becoming more accessible to the community.
Such recognition is most successfully achieved
when:
A Director of Medical Laboratory Services is
appointed and is effective in defining clearly lab-
oratory services in the Ministry of Health and
collating laboratory data to demonstrate the
essential role of laboratory services in epidem-
iology, diagnosis and treatment of disease, health
planning, and management of health resources.
ORGANIZATION AND STAFFING OF DISTRICT LABORATORY SERVICES 11
1.3–1.4
District medical officers become more involved
in developing laboratory policies and supporting
district laboratory personnel.
Medical laboratories:
are ade quately staffed by competent and
well motivated personnel.
are manage d and networked efficiently.
follow a professional code of practice which
incorporates standard operating procedures
(SOPs).
provide a service that is reliable, consistent,
relevant, and accountable.
A national Association of Medical (Biomedical)
Laboratory Sciences is formed.
N
ATIONAL ASSOCIATIONOF MEDICAL (BIOMEDICAL)
LABORATORYSCIENCES
The following are the important functions of an
Association of Medical Laboratory Sciences:
to discuss with health authorities the activities
and requirements of laboratories at district,
regional, and central level.
to promote national le gislation regarding the
professional registration of laboratory per-
sonnel and certification of laboratories to
practice.
to discuss with health authorities: lab oratory
training, supervision of trainees, continuing
education, staffing needs, employment,
working conditions, levels of remuneration,
and career development of qualified labora-
tory officers.
to organize lab oratory training and qualifica-
tion, set professional standards, inspect lab-
oratories, assess the appropriateness of new
technologies, and provide professional
support and continuing education.
to est ablish links with laboratory associations
in other countries and with the International
Association of Medical Laboratory
Technologists (IAMLT).
A professional laboratory association can only
function with the active support of its members.
An inexpensive, informative news sheet produced
quarterly can help to retain the interest of members
and increase the status of the medical laboratory
profession, particularly if health officials and medical
officers are invited to contribute articles.
12 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
1.4
Code of professional conduct for medical laboratory personnel
Be dedicated to the use of clinical laboratory science to benefit mankind.*
Place the well-being and service of patients above your own interests.
Be accountable for the quality and integrity of clinical laboratory services.*
Exercise professional judgement, skill, and care while meeting established standards.*
Do not misuse your professional skills or knowledge for personal gain, and never take anything from
your place of work that does not belong to you.
Be at all times courteous, patient, and considerate to patients and their relatives. Safeguard the
dignity and privacy of patients.*
Do not disclose to a patient or any unauthorized person the results of your investigations and treat
with strict confidentiality any personal information that you may learn about a patient.
Respect and work in harmony with the other members of your hospital staff or health centre team.
Promote health care and the prevention and control of disease.
Follow safe working practices and ensure patients and others are not put at risk. Know what to do
should an accident or fire occur and how to apply emergency First Aid.
Do not consume alcohol or take unprescribed drugs that could interfere with your work performance
during laboratory working hours or when on emergency stand-by.
Use equipment and laboratory-ware correctly and do not waste reagents or other laboratory supplies.
Strive to improve professional skills and knowledge and adopt scientific advances that benefit the
patient and improve the delivery of test results.*
Fulfill reliably and completely the terms and conditions of your employment.
*Taken from the Code of Ethicsof the International Association of Medical Laboratory Technologists.
REFERENCES
1 Laboratory services at the district level. World Health
Organization, Department of Essential Health
Technologies, 2003, p. 1–4. Website www.who.int/eht (to
be found under EHT Advocacy folder)
2 Mundy CJF et al. The operation, quality and costs of a
district hospital laboratory service in Malawi.
Transactions Royal Society Tropical Medicine and
Hygiene, 2003, 97, pp. 403–408.
3 Parry E et al. Principles of Medicine in Africa, 3rd edition,
2004. Cambridge University Press. Low price edition is
available.
4 Manual of basic techniques for a health laboratory. World
Health Organization, Geneva, 2nd edition, 2003, pp.
11–12.
5 Essential medical laboratory services project, Malawi
1998–2002, Final Report. Malawi Ministry of Health,
Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine, DFID.
Obtainable from HIV/AIDS Dept, Liverpool School
Tropical Medicine, Pembroke Place, Liverpool, L3 5QA,
UK.
6 Health laboratory facilities in emergency and disaster situ-
ations.World Health Organization, 1994 (WHO Regional
Publications Eastern Mediterranean Series No. 6).
Obtainable from WHO Regional Office, Abdul Razzak,
Al Sanbouri Street, Po Box 7608, Nasr City, Cairo, 11371,
Egypt.
7 Abbatt F, McMahon R. Teaching health care workers –
Practical guide, Macmillan publication, 2nd edition, 1993.
8 McMinn. Design of basic training for laboratory tech-
nicians. Developing Country Proceedings 17th Congress
International Association of Medical Laboratory
Technologists. Stockholm, 1986, pp. 176–188 (no longer
in print).
RECOMMENDED READING
Carter, JY and Kiu OJ. Clinicians’ Guide to Quality
Outpatient Diagnosis. A Manual for Tropical Countries,
AMREF, Kenya, 2005.
Manual of basic techniques for a health laboratory. World
Health Organization, Geneva, 2nd edition, 2003.
Lewis SM. Laboratory practice at the periphery in developing
countries. International Journal Haematology, 2002, Aug 76,
Supplement 1, pp. 294–298.
Essential medical laboratory services project, Malavi
1998–2002. Final Report. Malawi Ministry of Health,
Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine, DFID. For avail-
ability, see Reference 5.
Carter JY, Lema OE. Practical laboratory manual for health
centres in eastern Africa, Nairobi, 1994. African Medical and
Research Foundation, PO Box 30125, Nairobi, Kenya.
Bedu-Addo G, Bates I. Making the most of the laboratory. In
Principles of Medicine in Africa, 2004, pp. 1326–1329.
Cambridge University Press (available in low price edition).
WEBSITES
www.who.int/eht
This is the WHO website for the Department of Essential
Health and Technologies (EHT). It was established in 2002,
out of what was formerly the Dept of Blood Safety and
Clinical Technology (BCT). Laboratory technology is one
of the eight areas that come under the new EHT department.
A document entitled Laboratory services at district level can
be accessed from the website under EHT, Advocacy folder.
This outlines how to provide safe and reliable district labora-
tory services through a WHO Basic Operational Framework.
www.phclab.com
This website has been established by Gabriele Mallapaty to
assist primary health care laboratory workers in developing
countries. It carries news features, information on training,
total quality management (TQM), equipment resources, and
carries links to other relevant websites.
ORGANIZATION AND STAFFING OF DISTRICT LABORATORY SERVICES 13
1.4
2
Total quality management of district
laboratory services
14 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.1
2.1 Ensuring a reliable and
quality laboratory service
A reliable and quality laboratory service is achieved
and sustained not just by implementing quality
control of laboratory tests. This is important but only
part of what is needed. Increasingly the term total
quality management (TQM) is being used to
describe a more comprehensive and user-orientated
approach to quality. TQM addresses those areas of
laboratory practice that most influence how a lab-
oratory service functions and uses its resources to
provide a quality and relevant service.
Such a comprehensive commitment to quality is
essential to achieve:
best possible service to patients,
user confidence,
effectiveness and efficiency,
accountability,
optimal use of resources.
Successful TQM of district laboratory services re-
quires close collaboration between laboratory staff,
those who request laboratory tests, district laboratory
coordinator, district hospital medical officers, and the
district health management team.
C
ORRECT USE OF THE LABORATORY IN DISTRICT
HEALTHCAR E
Using the laboratory correctly in district health care
involves:
Selecting those investigations that are needed in:
curative health c are to establish or confirm a
diagnosis, assess a patient’s condition and
prognosis, and monitor progress during
treatment,
disease surveillance and the rapid investi-
gation of epidemics,
health prote ction, health promotion, and
health education,
health planning.
Note: Guidelines on the selection of laboratory
investigations and methods can be found in subunit
2.2.
Deciding whether those investigations that are
needed can be:
afforde d,
reliably performe d in district laboratories (see
Laboratory considerations in subunit 2.2).
Assessing whether those requesting laboratory
tests have sufficient training and experience to:
order diagnostic tests and epidemiologic al
laboratory investigations appropriately,
Total quality management in district
laboratory practice
TQM includes the following:
Correct use of the laboratory in district
health care.
Providing a quality service to patients and
those requesting tests.
Management of finances, equipment, and
supplies.
Staffing of district laboratories, training and
competence of staff.
Quality assurance to obtain correct test
results.
Responsibility for TQM.
Continuing improvement in quality.
TQM incorporates both the technical aspects of
quality assurance and those aspects of quality that
are important to the users of a laboratory service,
such as information provided, its correctness and
presentation, time it takes to get a test result, and the
professionalism and helpfulness of laboratory staff.
underst and the meaning of test results and
the limitations of laboratory tests (see sub-
unit 2.2).
use lab oratory data appropriately.
Reviewing the value of tests performed so that:
re dundant, out-dated tests become replaced
by tests that are more cost-effective, rapid,
informative, and easier to perform in district
laboratories,
new appropriate te chnologies are introduced
in response to changes in disease patterns,
district health priorities, and treatment of
diseases.
Monitoring the impact and cost-effectiveness of
district laboratory practice.
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 15
2.1
PROVIDING A Q UALITY SERVICE
Understanding and responding to the needs and
expectations of patients and those requesting
laboratory tests are key components of TQM.
If users of district laboratories are to receive a
quality service, the service provided must be:
Reliable and accountable: with tests performed,
using standard operating procedures (SOPs),
competently under routine and emergency
conditions and reports issued ‘on time’.
Accessible and available: through a network of
health centre laboratories and an efficient
specimen collection and transport system.
Professional: by laboratory staff knowing their
job, presenting clear and informative reports, and
respecting patient confidentiality.
User friendly: by laboratory staff communicating
courteously, informatively, and patiently, particu-
larly when the workload is high and the labora-
tory is being pressed for test results.
Dependable: by laboratory staff arriving at work
on time, not being absent unnecessarily, and not
allowing tests to be discontinued because
reagents have not been ordered correctly or in
good time, or equipment has failed because
preventive maintenance has not been carried out
or replacement parts ordered.
Flexible: to allow for the introduction of new
technologies in response to the needs of users
and changing health care strategies.
MANAGEMENTOF FINANCES, EQUIPMENT, AND
SUPPLIES
Good management of laboratory finances, equip-
ment and supplies are important functions of TQM.
Managing laboratory finances
The training of district laboratory officers must
include accountancy skills and how to keep accurate
records of requisitions, expenditures and income.
The financing of district laboratory practice,
estimating laboratory operating costs, and ways of
controlling laboratory expenditure are discussed in
subunit 2.3.
Managing laboratory equipment
Lack of an effective equipment management policy
is a major cause of:
District laboratories being under-equipped or
supplied with inappropriate equipment.
Evaluating district laboratory practice
Ask the views of those requesting laboratory
tests and enquire how the laboratory is
understood and rated by the community.
Find out whether those health centres with
laboratories are better attended than those
without laboratory facilities.
Review district morbidity and mortality data
and how laboratory tests have been used in
patient diagnosis and management.
Assess whether the causes of illhealth, such
as ‘fever’ are being better diagnosed when
the laboratory is used.
In areas with access to laboratory facilities,
determine whether there are fewer patients
presenting with complications resulting
from incorrect and late diagnoses.
Assess whether drug prescribing patterns
are different in those health centres with
laboratory facilities, particularly whether
drugs are being used more selectively with
fewer antimicrobial and antimalarial drugs
being prescribed.
Evaluate the extent to which district labora-
tory practice helps to define health priorities,
detect disease carriers, identify those at
greatest risk, and improve the local man-
agement of epidemics.
Review operating costs and whether oppor-
tunities exist for greater efficiency.
Assess whether laboratory practice is help-
ing to target district health resources more
effectively.
Equipment being purchased incorrectly, often
without a User Manual and essential replacement
parts.
Equipment failure due to laboratory staff not
being trained to use and care for equipment
correctly, and damage to equipment due to
unstable electricity supplies.
Health resources being wasted due to equip-
ment not being repaired.
Equipment related accidents and risks to staff
and others particularly when electrical equip-
ment is not connected or earthed correctly,
inspected regularly, and serviced.
Poor laboratory services to patients and relation-
ships between laboratory and medical staff
deteriorating as tests cannot be performed or
test results are delayed due to equipment break-
downs.
Laboratory staff becoming dissatisfied at not
being able to do their job.
To avoid such equipment related problems, the
management of equipment must include:
– guidelines covering equipment specifications,
standards, and purchasing.
inventory of all the equipment in the laboratory,
giving manufacturer, model details, date of pur-
chase and order number, price paid, supplier,
power requirements, source of replacement parts
with code numbers, checks and maintenance
schedules.
preparation of written standard operating pro-
cedures (SOPs) covering the use and mainten-
ance of each item of equipment with safety
considerations.
training of laboratory staff in the use, control, and
care of equipment and provision of continuing
on-site support.
procedure for reporting equipment faults and
ensuring faulty equipment is not used, and pro-
cedure for the rapid repair of equipment.
Note: Guidelines for the selection and purchasing of
equipment and how to keep equipment in working
order can be found in subunit 4.1. Equipment safety
is described in subunit 3.6.
Managing laboratory supplies
Before any district laboratory is established, a reliable
system for supplying it must be identified and orga-
nized. As mentioned in subunit 2.3, district labora-
tory costs must be budgeted separately from those
of pharmacy with a separate fund allocated and
16 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.1
available for the purchase of laboratory items.
A policy covering the regular supply of reagents
and other items to district laboratories and a system
for monitoring stocks are essential if laboratory
services are to be available and free from disruption
and staff are to remain motivated and not frustrated
in their work.
Every district laboratory, with the help of the
district laboratory coordinator, should prepare an
Essential Laboratory Reagents and Supplies List for
the items it needs on a regular basis. It is important
to purchase chemicals, reagents, test kits, and other
supplies from known reliable professional sources to
avoid receiving substandard goods, e.g. test kits
which have false expiry dates, or manipulated
potencies.
1
The quality of supplies must be checked
by a trained laboratory worker.
An efficient system is needed to supply outreach
laboratories with standardized reliable reagents and
other laboratory items. District laboratory staff must
keepaccurate signedre cordsof allitems requisitioned
andreceived. Supplies mustb erequested correctly. A
careful inventoryshould be kept of all supplies and a
workable systemfor controlling stock levels.
A reliable system must also be established for
packing and transporting laboratory supplies, includ-
ing heat-sensitive reagents, to outreach laboratories.
It is often possible to use the same system which
exists for the transport of essential drugs to health
centres.
STAFFINGOF DISTRICTLABORATORIES AND
COMPETENCE OF STAFF
The quality of district laboratory practice is directly
dependent on the quality of performance of district
laboratorypersonnel. Thosein chargeof district health
care andlaboratory services are responsible for:
Deciding the grades, salary structure, and num-
ber of laboratory personnel required to staff the
service and the career development of staff.
Preparing job descriptions for each grade of
district laboratory worker and the qualifications
each grade requires.
Ensuring all laboratory personnel are well trained
(see subunit 1.3) and supported in their work-
place.
Employing as district laboratory workers only
those who are:
qualifie d and competent,
intereste d in district health care,
speak the loc al language and are likely to be
accepted by the community.
Before being employed, a laboratory officer must
have:
visite d the laboratory in which he or she will
work,
studie d the job description and discussed
terms of employment,
produce d a valid Certificate of Qualification
(to be checked by the employer).
If previously employed, references should be
obtained.
Contract of employment
Employers should provide all laboratory personnel with a
written contract of employment, detailing grade of
worker, responsibilities, salary and method of payment,
hours of work, emergency working arrangements, vaca-
tion, and any other relevant issues.
Note: For all newly appointed district laboratory
staff, there should be a probationary working
period of three months.
Ensuring the working conditions of district lab-
oratory staff are safe and acceptable and staff are
paid according to their contract of employment.
Supervizing adequately the work of newly
appointed staff. The district laboratory coordi-
nator has a responsibility to visit all laboratories in
the district on a regular basis to discuss the work,
motivate staff, address any problems, check the
quality of reports and records, and assess work-
ing practices and performance standards.
Important: Where trainees perform laboratory
tests, their work must be supervized. No test re-
sult should be issued before it has been verified
by a qualified laboratory officer.
Providing support in the workplace and continu-
ing education for all district laboratory personnel
as discussed in subunit 1.3.
QUALITY ASSURANCE TO OBTAIN CORRECT TEST
RESULTS
Immediate and long term clinical, public health, and
health planning decisions are based on the results of
laboratory tests. Incorrect, delayed, or misinterpreted
test results can have serious consequences for
patients and communities, undermine confidence in
the service, and waste scarce district health
resources.
Achieving reliability of test results is dependent on:
Understanding what are the commonest causes
of inaccuracy and imprecision in the perform-
ance of tests and of delayed or misinterpreted
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 17
2.1
test results (see subunit 2.4, Quality assurance
and sources of error).
Taking the necessary steps to prevent and mini-
mize errors by:
implementing Standard Operating Pro-
cedures (SOPs) with quality control for all
district laboratory activities.
introducing every month a quality control
day and an external quality assessment
scheme for outreach laboratories (see later
text, Role of the district medical officer in
TQM).
appointing a district lab oratory coordinator
to monitor the performance of district lab-
oratories (see later text).
Agreeing with those requesting laboratory tests,
policies of work that will enable the laboratory to
provide an efficient, safe, cost-effective, and
reliable service (see subunit 2.4).
Maintaining good communications between lab-
oratory staff and those requesting tests.
Note: A definition of quality assurance (QA) and
how it is applied in district laboratory practice can be
found on pages 31–34. Guidelines on the QA of
parasitological tests are described on pages
178–182, clinical chemistry tests on pages 313–333,
microbiology on pages 3–6 in Part 2, haematology
tests on pages 267–270 in Part 2, and blood
transfusion techniques on pages 350–351 in Part 2.
RESPONSIBILITYFOR TQM
In tropical and developing countries few district hos-
pitals have a resident or visiting pathologist or even
a medical officer with sufficient knowledge of lab-
oratory practice to assist in the running of district
laboratories. In the past this has lead to neglect of
district laboratories and poor performance by staff.
With the development of district health care sys-
tems, most district laboratory services are now man-
aged locally by a district laboratory coordinator
helped by a district hospital medical officer trained in
the use of laboratory investigations and basic quality
assurance.
Responsibilities of the district laboratory
coordinator
The person appointed as a district laboratory coordi-
nator must be a senior well trained medical labora-
tory officer with management skills and several years
experience of district laboratory practice and training
of laboratory personnel. Opportunities must be pro-
vided for continued professional development and
the learning of management skills.
The most important responsibilities of the district
laboratory coordinator are to:
Assist in the establishment, integration, and
management of district laboratories.
Visit district laboratories at least every three
months to help and motivate staff, monitor the
quality of laboratory service being provided,
discuss problems, and inform staff of important
district health activities.
Help to prepare, apply, and update standard
operating procedures (SOPs) for district labora-
tories.
Implement and monitor safe working practices
and investigate laboratory accidents.
Promote effective communication between lab-
oratories, and good working relationships
between laboratory staff, patients, and those
requesting laboratory tests.
Check whether equipment is functioning well
and whether laboratory workers are using, clean-
ing, controlling/calibrating, and maintaining
equipment correctly.
Make sure essential reagents and other supplies
are being ordered correctly and reaching labora-
tories satisfactorily.
Examine quality control data, laboratory reports,
and records.
Help laboratory staff to learn new skills and work
more efficiently.
Implement an effective quality assurance scheme
to assess the performance of laboratory staff and
promote continuous improvement in the quality
of district laboratory services.
Investigate complaints from users of the labora-
tory and check whether the waiting time for test
results is acceptable.
Review the routine, emergency, and ‘on call’
workload of district laboratories.
Evaluate laboratory operating costs and prepare
the yearly budget.
Check whether there is any unauthorized use of
district laboratories.
Make sure specimens are being collected and
transported correctly and the system for referring
specimens from health centres to the hospital
laboratory is working well.
Ensure district laboratory staff are well trained for
18 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.1
their job (see subunit 1.3) and the work of
trainees is being adequately supervized.
Participate in laboratory clinical meetings and
district health meetings.
Every three months prepare a laboratory report
for the district health management team, detail-
ing the utilization of district laboratories, tests
requested, workload, laboratory expenditures,
staff needs and training.
Important: Because of the comprehensive duties of
the district laboratory coordinator, it is rec-
ommended that the person appointed to do this job
is carefully selected and is not already fulltime
employed as laboratory officer in charge of the dis-
trict hospital laboratory. A check list should be pre-
pared of the activities which need to be performed
during visits to the district’s laboratories and also a
list of the tools, spares, reagents, standards, etc, that
the coordinator should take.
Role of the district hospital medical officer in
TQM of district laboratory services
The medical officer appointed to help in the running
of district laboratory services must be a good com-
municator and ‘laboratory-friendly’.
2
The following
are practical ways in which a district hospital medical
officer with only a limited knowledge of laboratory
procedures can help to motivate laboratory staff and
contribute to improving the quality of service
provided, particularly that of the district hospital
laboratory:
Visiting the laboratory on a regular basis to dis-
cuss the workload, any specimen collection prob-
lems, and any difficulties which may be affecting
the quality of work or well being of the labora-
tory staff.
Promoting good communications between the
laboratory and the medical and nursing staff and
monitoring how the results of tests are being
used.
Monitoring whether test results are being
verified and clearly reported on request forms,
and whether the target turnaround times for
tests are being met and if not how the situation
can be improved.
Checking with the senior laboratory officer
whether equipment maintenance schedules are
being performed.
Observing whether essential safety is being prac-
tised, e.g. glassware and plasticware are being
decontaminated before being washed and
reused, specimens are being collected, tested
and disposed of safely, laboratory staff are not
mouth-pipetting specimens and reagents, the
laboratory is being kept clean and tidy, flam-
mable and toxic chemicals are being stored
safely, laboratory staff know what to do if there is
a fire and are trained in essential First Aid.
Investigating the reasons for any tests not being
performed, particularly if due to supplies not
being ordered or delivered.
Establishing with the help of the district labora-
tory coordinator, a monthly quality control day.
Quality control day: This can best be achieved by
the medical officer dividing a few specimens,
giving each a different identity and checking
whether the results of all the specimens are the
same (within acceptable limits). If not, the medi-
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 19
2.1
cal officer should ask the senior laboratory officer
to investigate the likely cause(s), e.g. SOPs not
being followed by the staff, an instrument
malfunctioning, variable pipetting, deteriorating
reagents, staff not having sufficient experience.
To control the reporting of microscopical
preparations, the medical officer should obtain
stained quality control smears of specimens from
the district laboratory coordinator, e.g. smears
showing malaria parasites, trypanosomes, AFB,
gram negative diplococci, blood cells, etc. The
medical officer should ask as many of the staff as
possible to examine the preparations.
Holding monthly clinical meetings with labora-
tory staff and the district laboratory coordinator
to discuss interesting test results and the findings
of the quality control day.
CORRECT USE OF THE
LABORATORY IN
DISTRICT HEALTH CARE
see subunits 2.1 and 2.2
MANAGEMENT OF
EQUIPMENT AND
SUPPLIES
see subunits 2.1 and 4.1
TRAINING AND
ONGOING SUPPORT
OF STAFF IN THE WORK
PLACE
see subunits 2.1 and 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
SOPs, QC, EQA.
GOOD
COMMUNICATIONS
see subunits 2.1, 2.4, 2.7
MANAGEMENT OF
FINANCES AND
BUDGETING
see subunit 2.3
PROVIDING A QUALITY
SERVICE TO USERS OF
THE LABORATORY
see subunit 2.1
Abbreviations: TQM Total Quality Management, QA Quality Assurance, SOPs Standard Operating Procedures, QC Quality
Control, EQAExternal Quality Assessment.
TQM
2.2 Selection of tests and
interpretation of test results
The importance of using laboratory investigations
correctly in district health care has been outlined in
subunit 2.1 (TQM). This subunit covers in more
detail the factors that need to be considered when
selecting tests and interpreting test reports.
20 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.1–2.2
REASONS FOR PERFORMING LABORATORY TESTS
The reasons for performing laboratory tests and
follow-up investigations must be clear. The tests
performed in district laboratories must reflect the
common and emergency health needs of the area
and provide information that can be easily inter-
preted. The tests must also be efficient, i.e. provide
sufficient benefit to justify their cost and any risks
involved in their performance.
Medical officers should encourage qualified ex-
perienced laboratory staff to provide maximum
information from laboratory tests and to proceed to
further testing when this is obviously indicated and
will lead to better and earlier treatment for a
patient.
Examples of maximizing information from laboratory tests
When examining a thick stained blood film for malaria
parasites, report also if the neutrophils or eosinophils are
significantly increased. If no parasites are found check the
preparation for trypanosomes or borreliae if the patient is
from an area where these organisms are found.
Check also for significant background reticulocytosis
which may indicate sickle cell disease if the patient
(particularly a child) is from a haemoglobin S (Hb S)
prevalent area. Perform a sickle cell test and examine a
thin stained blood film.
If many malaria parasites are found in the blood of a
young child, measure and monitor the haemoglobin.
When pus cells are found in the urine from a male patient,
Gram stain the urine sediment and look for Gram nega-
tive intracellular diplococci, indicative of gonorrhoea.
When finding glycosuria, measure the fasting blood
glucose.
If red cells and protein are found in urine from a patient
living in a schistosomiasis endemic area, examine the
urine sediment for S. haematobiumeggs.
If blood and mucus are present in faeces, examine the
specimen carefully for the eggs of S. mansoni or motile
amoebae with ingested red cells, indicative of amoebic
dysentery.
If faeces appears like rice water, inoculate it in alkaline
peptone water and look for vibrio.
If there is a rapid fall in haemoglobin and a rising ESR in
a febrile patient from a trypanosomiasis endemic area,
check the blood for trypanosomes.
When the blood film from an adult shows significant
hypochromia and the haemoglobin is low, check the
faeces for hookworm eggs.
In deciding which tests and test methods are appro-
priate it is important to consider:
the clinical and public health needs of the district,
wellbeing of patients,
laboratory technical aspects,
costs involved.
Continuing improvement in quality
The following are effective ways of monitoring
progress and implementing ongoing improve-
ment in the quality of district laboratory ser-
vices:
Discussing with the users of district labora-
tories what changes and improvements are
needed and how laboratory tests can be
used more cost-effectively and efficiently.
Regularly reviewing and updating standard
operating procedures and laboratory
policies.
Improving the system for supplying district
laboratories.
Monitoring quality control and the effective-
ness of the district quality assessment
scheme.
Investigating errors at the time they occur,
taking corrective action, and checking
whether the action taken has been effective.
Considering how to improve specimen
collection and transport in the district and
how to reduce the time patients wait for test
results.
Providing on-site continuing education and
support for district laboratory staff.
Ensuring all laboratories in the district
are kept informed of district health pro-
grammes.
Looking ahead, planning, and budgeting
realistically for future laboratory needs.
Promoting the right attitude to quality which
has been summarized by Elsenga as ‘willing
people make failing systems work, unwilling
people make working systems fail’.
3
Clinical and public health considerations
Priority diagnostic tests
Priority should be given to selecting those tests that
help to diagnose those conditions:
that are difficult to diagnose accurately from clin-
ical symptoms alone, particularly at an early stage
of an illness, when a patient has a secondary
infection or has received drugs or herbal
medication at home before attending the clinic.
that require lengthy, high risk, or expensive treat-
ment.
that can cause epidemics with high mortality or
much illhealth and disability.
Tests needed in treatment, disease control and
prevention
Other tests will also be required in the treatment,
control, and prevention of disease to:
achieve a more rational and selective use of
drugs.
detect and monitor drug resistance particularly
resistance to antimalarials and antibiotics.
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 21
2.2
assess the severity of illness and likely outcome of
an illness.
make the treatment and care of a patient safer
and help to assess the effectiveness of treatment.
establish a baseline value for follow-up care.
assess whether a patient being treated in a health
centre needs to be referred to the district hospi-
tal for specialist care.
monitor anaemia or occupational disease.
monitor the health of pregnant women.
improve the care of HIV infected persons.
– identify disease carriers and improve case-
finding.
detect carriers of Hb S as part of family planning
counselling services.
monitor microbial pollution of community water
supplies.
prevent blood transmissible infections, particu-
larly those caused by HIV and hepatitis viruses.
promote community health education.
– increase the validity of disease reporting by
providing reliable information on the causes and
pattern of illhealth in the community.
Important: Clinicians and public health officers must
be kept up to date regarding the availability and rel-
evance of new technologies. Laboratory personnel
need to know how tests are used to be able to
report tests informatively.
The sensitivity and specificity of tests are
explained in subunit 2.2.
Patient considerations
In the selection of tests and test methods the follow-
ing are important patient considerations:
Many patients requiring laboratory investigations
in tropical and developing countries will be
young children, therefore specimen collection
techniques must be appropriate.
Specimen collection techniques for all patients
must be safe, respectful of the person, as stress
free as possible, and culturally acceptable.
When several different tests requiring blood are
required, the tests should be coordinated to
avoid the unnecessary repeated collection of
blood from patients.
A high proportion of patients will be outpatients
requiring their test results before receiving treat-
ment, therefore rapid techniques are needed.
Tests performed must lead to improved quality
of patient care and be affordable. Patients should
Relevance of laboratory tests
It is both wasteful and unscientific to perform
laboratory tests:
that provide little useful clinical or public
health information,
that contribute only minimally to patient
management and quality of care,
that are not sufficiently rapid, reliable,
sensitive, or specific for the purpose.
Tests should be requested rationally and specifi-
cally based on the value of the information they
provide and their cost-effectiveness. Ordering
several tests that provide similar information
cannot be justified. Asking the following ques-
tions will help medical officers to request tests
appropriately:
why am I requesting this test?
is it affordable?
can the laboratory perform it reliably, and
how long will it take to get the result?
what will I look for in the result?
how will it affect my diagnosis and my care
of the patient?
ultimately, what will be the benefits to the
patient and to the community?
always be advized why a particular test is needed
and what is required in providing the speci-
men(s).
Whenever possible patients should not have to
travel considerable distances for essential labora-
tory investigations, e.g. tests required by preg-
nant women.
Laboratory considerations
The following are important technical considerations
in the selection of tests, test methods, and in decid-
ing which tests should be performed in outreach
laboratories and in the district hospital laboratory:
Competence and experience of local laboratory
staff and whether support can be provided on a
regular basis.
How well a test can be standardized and con-
trolled in the laboratory in which it will be
performed.
Communication and transport links that exist
between outreach laboratories and the hospital
laboratory to facilitate the referral of specimens.
Reagents, standards, controls, and consum-
mables required to perform tests, including their
cost, complexity of preparation or availability as
ready-made products, stability and storage and
hazards associated with their use particularly in
outreach laboratories.
Quality and quantity of water required.
Equipment needed, including its running cost,
power requirements, complexity and safety of
use, maintenance, local repair facilities and avail-
ability of replacement parts, anticipated reliability
and working life.
Type of specimen required, including its collec-
tion, stability, transport, storage, safe handling
and disposal.
Performance time of tests and how frequently
particular tests are requested.
Cost considerations
The following are important financial considerations
when selecting tests and test methods:
How expensive is the test, for example:
what is the cost of colle cting the specimen
including the cost of the specimen container,
and is there a significant cost in preparing
the patient?
does the test re quire the use of inexpensive
reagents that can be prepared locally or ex-
pensive reagents and controls that have a
22 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.2
limited shelf-life and need to be imported?
does the test re quire the use of equipment
which is expensive to operate and maintain?
is the te chnique simple and rapid or com-
plex and lengthy, and does it require the
skills of a specialist laboratory officer?
Note: Subunit 2.3 describes how to estimate the
unit cost of a test based on laboratory operating
costs, number of tests performed, and the work-
load unit value of the test.
What are the costs of the different technologies?
Can using an expensive technology be justified
when there is a reliable cheaper alternative for
obtaining the same or similar information? A
costly newtechnology does not necessarily mean
that itwill have improved performance character-
istics and be more appropriate. It may even have
important limitations, e.g. a rapidmalaria antigen
test that is not able to differentiate species.
Is it cost effective for district laboratories to use:
clinic al chemistry kits for frequently per-
formed tests when the reagents and
standards can be easily and cheaply made in
the laboratory?
a diagnostic kit test in district lab oratories
when the format of the kit is designed for
testing large numbers of specimens at one
time and the working reagents have poor
stability?
urine reagent strip tests in areas of high rela-
tive humidity when moisture causes the
strips to deteriorate rapidly, resulting in sig-
nificant wastage (and unreliable test results).
How will the cost of tests be met? It is essential
that tests are ordered only when they are
needed and the cost is known of each test when
performed in a health centre laboratory and in
the district hospital laboratory.
Note: Financing district laboratory services and con-
trolling laboratory costs are discussed in the next
subunit (2.3).
How to decide which tests are the most
important in community-based health care
Answering the following questions will help medical
officers and community health workers to decide
which tests are the most important in meeting
individual and community health needs:
1 What are the commonest and most life-
threatening conditions for which people seek
medical care? Make separate lists for infants,
children, men, non-pregnant women, pregnant
women.
2 What conditions are the most difficult to diag-
nose? Which laboratory tests are the most likely
to assist in investigating these? Which conditions
if misdiagnosed could have serious conse-
quences for an individual and public health?
3 For what symptoms are antibiotics being pre-
scribed and how often? Which laboratory tests
could be used to confirm a diagnosis or rule out
an infection before prescribing an antibiotic?
4 What is the transmission pattern of malaria? How
often are antimalarials being prescribed without
confirming the diagnosis microscopically? Is drug
resistance a problem?
Misdiagnosis of malaria
An increasing number of surveys show malaria is often
misdiagnosed both by experienced and less experienced
medical officers and community health workers, leading
to costly antimalarial drugs being prescribed unnecessari-
ly, and the true cause of a patients’s illness remaining
undiagnosed. Misdiagnosis also leads to incorrect report-
ing of malaria incidence.
5 How many patients are being treated without
being diagnosed, e.g. patients with fever of un-
known origin, headache, or general body pain?
Go back through several months’ records to
include seasonal influences.
6 How many patients return to see the medical
officer or community health worker because the
prescribed drugs or other treatment appear not
to have worked? Looking back, could any lab-
oratory test if performed at the time of the first
visit have helped the patient to receive a more
appropriate treatment and prevent their con-
dition worsening.
7 Are there any prevalent infectious diseases in the
community which the laboratory could investi-
gate to assist in breaking the cycle of transmis-
sion and preventing reinfection?
8 In the last 12 months have there been any
serious epidemics which the laboratory could
have helped to bring more quickly under control
or even helped to prevent?
9 Are there any major health education pro-
grammes which the laboratory could make more
effective, e.g. demonstrating microscopically the
parasites that cause schistosomiasis?
10 How many young children and adults are
needing to travel to the district hospital for lab-
oratory investigations? List the tests being
requested.
Important: It will not be possible in a community-
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 23
2.2
based laboratory to perform all the tests that are
needed to meet individual and community health
needs. Some of the limiting factors are discussed in
subunit 1.2.
Further information:Important guidelines on the selection of
laboratory tests can be found in a WHO laboratory document:
Laboratory services for primary health care: requirements for
essential clinical laboratory tests (see Recommended
Reading).
LABORATORYREQUEST FORM
The format of laboratory request forms should be
clear and standardized throughout the district. The
layout should be discussed and agreed by labora-
tory staff and users of the laboratory service.
Whenever possible laboratory request forms,
suitable for use in district laboratories should be pre-
pared by a central stationery office. Where forms are
not supplied from a central source, simple request
forms can be prepared locally. Standardization and
clarity in presenting and reporting results can be
achieved by the use of rubber stamps (see Fig. 2.1).
Adequate ink, however, must be used and the
stamp must be positioned carefully.
Information to accompany requests for
laboratory tests
The laboratory request form should be dated and
provide the following information:
Patient’s full name, age, and gender.
Address or village of patient (valuable epidemio-
logical data).
Inpatient or outpatient identification number.
Relevant clinical information regarding patient’s
condition.
Details of drugs or local medicines taken by or
administered to the patient before visiting the
health unit or hospital, and drugs that have been
administered by the health unit or hospital prior
to collecting the specimen, e.g. antimicrobials,
antimalarial drugs.
Specific test(s) required.
Specimen provided.
Origin of request if from an outreach health
centre or maternity unit.
Name of the medical officer, community health
worker, or midwife requesting the test and to
whom the report should be sent.
Urgent tests: Only those tests should be
requested urgently that are required for the
immediate care of a patient or to manage a serious
public health situation.
Note: The specimen container must be clearly
labelled with the patient’s name, identification
number, and the date and time of collection.
Patient confidentiality
As soon as request forms and specimens are
received by the laboratory the staff have a responsi-
bility to ensure the request forms are not read by
unauthorized persons.
Laboratory staff must never disclose any
information they may learn about a patient or a test
result to anyone other than the health personnel
caring for the patient. Respecting patient confiden-
tiality must also extend to when laboratory reports
are issued. Reports should be delivered in sealed
envelopes,labelle dCO NFIDENTIAL LABORATORY
REPORTS, or in labelled sealed folders which can be
returned to the laboratory for re-use.
REPORTING AND RECORDING TEST RESU LTS
Laboratory staff should provide as much relevant in-
formation as possible to assist those requesting tests
to interpret the results of tests correctly and use the
information in the best possible way to benefit
patients and the community. Reports should be
clearly and neatly written (particularly figures).
Standardization in reporting test results
Standardization in the presentation of reports and
use of units is important because it helps in the
interpretation and comparison of results, contributes
to the efficiency of a laboratory service, and is of
value when patients are referred from one health
unit or hospital to another. The use of SI units in the
reporting of tests can be found in subunit 2.5.
Laboratory reports in patients’ notes
The system sometimes used in district hospitals of
‘charting’, or transferring, laboratory results from lab-
oratory registers or from laboratory request forms
into patients’ notes is not recommended. Not only is
it time-consuming but it can give rise to serious
errors when results are not copied correctly or in
their entirety. A patient’s notes must contain the
signed reports issued by the laboratory.
When resources are limited, an inexpensive reli-
able way of inserting laboratory reports in patients’
24 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.2
notes is to report results on small stamped forms
and attach these to a sheet of paper reserved for
Laboratory Reports in each patient’s notes. If the
pieces of paper are arranged as shown in Fig. 2.1,
several reports can be attached to one sheet.
Keeping laboratory reports in one place in a
patient’s notes has the added advantage that the
latest test result can be quickly compared with a
previous result.
Recording results in the laboratory
In district laboratories, records of test results can be
kept by retaining carbon copies of reports, using
work sheets, or recording test results in registers (ex-
ercise books). Whichever system is used it must be
reliable and enable patients’ results to be found
quickly. Test records are also required when prepar-
ing work reports and estimating the workload of the
laboratory.
If carbon copies or work sheets are used these
must be dated and filed systematically each day. If
registers are used, backing cards which are headed
and ruled can be placed behind pages to avoid
having to rule and head each page separately. The
cards must be heavily ruled with a marker pen so
that the lines can be seen clearly. Separate registers,
each with its own cards, can be prepared to record
the results of haematological, microbiological, clinical
chemistry, urine and faecal tests. Examples of cards
which could be used in a Urine Analysis Register are
shown in Fig. 2.2.
In smaller district laboratories the registers can
also be used to record daily quality control infor-
mation, e.g. reading of a haemoglobin control. Daily
checks on the performance of equipment, e.g. tem-
perature readings should be recorded in a quality
control (QC) book or on separate sheets as part of
equipment control procedures.
INTERPRETATION OF TEST REPORTS
In the use and interpretation of laboratory test re-
sults it is important to understand the limitations of
tests, e.g. the ability of tests to indicate when disease
is present or absent or whether the value in a report
is normal or abnormal for a patient. Reference
ranges are required for the interpretation of quanti-
tative test results.
The performance characteristics of tests are also
important, e.g. how accurately and precisely (repro-
ducibly) a test can be performed (see subunit 2.4)
and for some tests, reader variability can also be
important (see later text).
Ability of diagnostic tests to indicate presence
or absence of disease
The ability of a diagnostic test to indicate when a
disease is present or absent is dependant on its
quality and is described in terms of:
sensitivity,
specificity,
predictive value.
Sensitivity (true positive rate)
This is the frequency of positive test results in
patients with a particular disease, e.g. 95% sensitivity
implies 5% false negatives. A test which has 100%
sensitivity is always abnormal (or positive) in patients
with the disease.
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 25
2.2
Calculating sensitivity
Sensitivity
Screening tests should be sensitive to ensure
that where possible, a positive test result is obtained
in all patients with the disease. The higher the sen-
sitivity of a test, the less likely it is to fail to diagnose
a person as having the disease, i.e. the fewer
the number of false negative results. For example,
it is important to use a high sensitivity HIV serolog-
ical test when screening blood supplies for HIV
antibody.
Analytical sensitivity: this is different to statistical sensitivity
as described above. Analytical sensitivity relates to the lowest
result which can be reliably differentiated from zero.
total number positive results

total number infected patients
Fig. 2.1 Transfering laboratory results into the hospital notes of a patient.
a) Sheet in patient’s notes on to which laboratory report forms are gummed or stapled.
b) Close-up of a simple laboratory form. A rubber stamp can be used to print the upper part of the form.
Fig. 2.2 Example of an exercise book with card inserts to record test results. The lines from the ruled cards show through the
pages of the book
Specificity (false positive rate)
This is the frequency of negative test results in
patients without that disease. A 95% specificity
implies 5% false positives.
Calculating specificity
Specificity
Definitive tests should be specific to ensure a
patient is not incorrectly diagnosed as having the
disease, i.e. false positive result. The higher the speci-
ficity of a test, the less likely it is to diagnose a
person who does not have the disease as having it,
i.e. the fewer the number of false positive results.
Examples of tests with high specificity include the
Ziehl-Neelsen technique for AFB, and microscopical
parasitological diagnostic techniques where parasitic
forms can be identified. Sensitivity, however, can
vary greatly particularly when pathogens are ex-
creted intermittently or in variable numbers or when
only a small amount of specimen is examined.
Neither specificity nor sensitivity is dependent on
the prevalence of disease for which the test is being
performed.
Analytical specificity: this is different to statistical specificity
as described above. Analytical specificity depends on whether
only the substance under investigation is measured.
Predictive value of a positive test result
This is the percentage of positive results that are true
positives when a test is performed on a defined
population containing both healthy and diseased
persons. It depends not only on the specificity and
sensitivity of the test but particularly on the preva-
lence of the disease in the population tested as can
be shown in the following examples:
Predictive % value of positive test result
100
Examples
Low prevalence and predictive value of a positive test.
For example, if a test has 90% sensitivity, 95% specificity (5%
false positives), and the condition it detects has a 2% preva-
lencein the population it follows that:
2% prevalence means, of 1000 persons, 20 have the
disease in the population.
18 will be detected (true positives), i.e. 90% of 20 based
on 90% sensitivity.
49 will have false positive tests, i.e. 5% of 980 based on
95% specificity.
there will be a total 67 positive tests (18 true, 49 false).
Predictive value of positive test:
100 27%
18 (true positives)

67 (all positive tests)
True positives

True positives False positives
total number negative results

total number uninfected patients
26 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.2
The predictive value of a positive test is therefore low when
the prevalence is low.
High prevalence and predictive value of a positive test
For example, if the test has 90% sensitivity, 95% specificity
and the condition it detects has a 20% prevalence in the
population it follows that:
20% prevalence means of 1000 persons, 200 have the
disease in the population.
180 will be true positives, i.e. 90% of 200.
40 will have false positive tests, i.e. 5% of 800.
there will be a total of 220 positive tests (180 true, 40
false)
Predictive value of positive test:
100 82%.
The predictive value of a positive test is therefore high when
the prevalence is high.
Predictive values are important diagnostically as they
give the probability that an abnormal result comes
from someone with disease. The higher the predic-
tive value of a test, the higher the possibility in any
population that a positive test means disease.
If a disease has a low prevalence in the popu-
lation being tested, there will be a higher number of
false positive results due to the higher proportion of
persons without the disease and therefore a positive
result has a lower predictive value.
The positive predictive value of a test for a
disease will increase both with the sensitivity of the
test and the prevalence of the disease. To be useful,
a test’s predictive value must be greater than the
prevalence of the disease.
Even when a test is highly sensitive and specific
there is still a possibility of false positive results when
the prevalence of the disease is low. Confirmatory
testing becomes important in these situations.
Reader variability
The reader variability percentage gives an indication
of how easy it is to report a visually read test. The
clearer a test result is to read the lower will be the
reader variability. Difficult to read test results will
result in greater reader variation.
Reader variability is one of the operational
characteristics used by WHO to evaluate HIV test
kits when the readings are performed without
equipment. The reader variability is expressed by
WHO as the percentage of sera for which test results
are differently interpreted by different readers. To
reduce reader variability, most manufacturers of
serological tests include weak positive controls and
artwork showing a range of positive test results.
Some manufacturers make available instruments to
reduce the variability inherent in reading test results
visually.
180 (true positives)

220 (all positive tests)
In reporting microscopical preparations, reader
variability can be reduced by using reference prep-
arations to assist in the identification of organisms
and cells, preparing specimens correctly, and exam-
ining preparations for the correct length of time.
Recognizing that some specimens and preparations
will always be more difficult to report, reader vari-
ability can be minimized by following standardized
procedures, using adequate controls and reference
materials, and by improving the quality of training
and supervision when introducing new tests.
REFERENCE RAN GES FOR QUANTITATIVETESTS
Laboratory staff and those requesting tests should
know the accepted reference ranges and clinical
significance of the results of the quantitative tests
performed in the laboratory. This will ensure that
significantly abnormal results are detected, checked,
reported, and acted on as soon as possible. Prompt
action by laboratory staff may prevent loss of life or
lead to an earlier treatment with more rapid recov-
ery for a patient.
Clinical significance of abnormal test results
The clinical significance of abnormal results for the quantita-
tive tests included in this publication can be found at the end
of each test method.
Test results are affected both by biological and lab-
oratory analytical factors and these need to be
considered when deciding the reference range for
each test.
Biological factors
The following are among the biological factors that
contribute to differences in test results among
healthy people:
Age: e.g. higher plasma urea concentrations are
found in the elderly. Alkaline phosphatase activity
is higher in growing children compared with
adults. Reference values from neonates are very
different from those of adults.
Gender: e.g. higher values of haemoglobin,
plasma creatinine, urate, and urea are found in
men compared with women during the repro-
ductive phase of life.
Diet and nutritional state: e.g. plasma cholesterol
and calcium are affected by diet.
Time of the day (diurnal variation): e.g. serum
iron levels rise as the day progresses.
Posture: e.g. plasma protein levels are lower in
samples collected from patients when they are
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 27
2.2
lying down.
Muscular activity: e.g. the concentration of
plasma creatinine rises following exercise.
Dehydration: e.g. haemoglobin, PCV, white
blood cells increase due to decrease in plasma
volume.
Reference ranges are also affected by weight, phase
of menstrual cycle, emotional state, geographical
location, rural or city life, climate, genetic factors,
cultural habits, smoking, and homeostatic variation.
Some reference values are also altered during
pregnancy, e.g. haemoglobin and PCV values
decrease and neutrophil numbers increase.
Analytical factors
Among the analytical factors that influence reference
ranges the most significant are:
Type of sample:e.g. the concentration of glucose
is 12–13% higher in plasma than in whole blood.
Small variations also occur between serum and
plasma samples for potassium and some other
substances.
Test method: e.g. a glucose oxidase enzyme
method will give a narrower reference range for
blood glucose than a Folin-Wu technique be-
cause the enzyme method is specific for glucose.
Performance: Some tests can be performed with
less variation than others. The reference ranges
for such tests will therefore be narrower.
How reference ranges are established
The reference range for a particular substance is
worked out by testing and plotting a graph of fre-
quency of value against concentration. For some
assays the graph produced is symmetrical in shape
Fig. 2.3 Symmetrical distribution (Gaussian) graph
showing the highest number of people having
values around the mean (average) with a gradual
decrease in frequency on each side of the mean as
shown in Fig. 2.3.
In statistical terms the distribution of values
around the mean can be expressed as standard
deviation (SD). When the results of a particular test
show a symmetrical (Gaussian) type curve, the refer-
ence range for the substance being measured is de-
fined by a plus or minus 2 SD from the mean (see
Fig. 2.4). This covers 95% of the ‘healthy’ population
(1 SD covers 68% of the population, and 3 SD
covers 99.7% of the population).
28 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.2–2.3
There can be no clear dividing line between
‘normal’ and ‘abnormal’ values. This is one of the
reasons why the term reference range is preferred to
normal range. To interpret test results adequately,
not only should the reference values provided by the
laboratory be considered by clinicians, but also the
levels of abnormality which are likely to be present
in different diseases and in the early and late stages
of a disease.
Action to take when results are seriously
abnormal
As part of standard operating procedures and QA,
laboratories need to decide what procedure should
be followed when a result is seriously abnormal or
unexpected, e.g. when compared with a previous
recent result. For some tests it may be appropriate to
define a level of abnormality which leads to
immediate action being taken by laboratory staff to
check the result and inform the person treating the
patient.
Important: Whenever a result is communicated
orally, the written report should be issued as soon as
possible. Before being issued, all reports must be
checked (verified) by the most experienced member
of the laboratory staff. Verification of reports is par-
ticularly important when trainees are performing
tests.
2.3 Financing district
laboratory services and
controlling costs
In most developing countries, district laboratory ser-
vices are financed centrally by the ministry of health
or at district level through district health councils.
In some countries, laboratory and pharmacy services
share a common budget. Such a policy, however, is
not satisfactory because it frequently leads to under-
resourcing of laboratory services as priority is given
to purchasing drugs. It is therefore recommended
that laboratory services be budgeted and funded
separately. To manage laboratory finances efficiently,
accurate records must be kept of laboratory expen-
ditures and the workload of the laboratory.
Cost recovery schemes
Increasingly district health expenditures are being
met in part by patients contributing towards their
Assessing reference (normal) ranges
Because reference ranges are affected by a variety
of biological and analytical factors, they should be
regarded only as approximate interim reference
ranges to be assessed by clinicians and laboratory
staff at a later stage when sufficient data becomes
available. The central laboratory should assist in
confirming reference values for the population.
Note: The reference ranges given in this publication
have been compiled from accepted western values
and those received by the author from a small num-
ber of tropical countries.
Interpretation of results outside the reference
range
If a patient’s result is outside of the accepted refer-
ence range this does not necessarily indicate ill
health. The patient may be in the 5% minority
healthy group outside the Mean 2 SD range.
Fig. 2.4 Example of Gaussian distribution of plasma total
protein giving a reference range of 60–80 g/l.
health care costs. A partial cost-recovery scheme
provides a revolving fund for the purchase of essen-
tial supplies.
Local fees for laboratory tests should not be
more than can be afforded by patients. Applying an
affordable flat standard rate for the laboratory ser-
vice will help all patients to be tested according to
their health need. Most patients recognize that
reliable locally accessible laboratory testing improves
the quality of their care and often avoids a repeat
visit to the health care centre or a longer more
expensive journey to the district hospital laboratory.
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 29
2.3
Cost of services including electricity, gas,
kerosene, water supply, water filtration units and
communication equipment.
Cost of inspecting, maintaining, and repairing
equipment and equipment depreciation.
Cost of replacing worn or broken items such as:
counting chamb ers
pipettes and general glassware and plastic-
ware,
cleaning utensils,
lab oratory linen.
Cost of specimen containers, swabs, cotton wool,
and dressings.
Cost of stationery including:
re cord books,
lab oratory request forms,
lab els,
pens and markers.
Travel and transport costs including the visits of
the district laboratory coordinator.
Expenditure involved in cleaning and maintain-
ing the laboratory, and keeping it secure.
Variable and fixed costs
The cost of supplies including reagents and consummables are
usually referred to as variable costs while salaries, equipment
maintenance and depreciation, supervision, and overhead
costs are referred to as fixed costs. Careful records of expen-
ditures must be kept.
Financing health centre laboratories
The operating costs of health centre laboratories
tend to be low because many of the tests are inex-
pensive. If, however, the health centre is not well
attended the cost of maintaining an underutilized
laboratory may be unacceptably high. In an under-
utilized situation it may be more cost-effective to
operate the laboratory on a part-time basis and train
a member of the nursing staff to perform the
required tests and manage the laboratory. It may
also be more cost-effective to send specimens for
non-urgent tests to the district hospital laboratory
when there are reliable facilities for transporting the
specimens and rapid return of test results.
Note: The cost factors that need to be considered
when selecting tests and test methods have been
discussed in the previous subunit (2.2).
Estimating costs of tests
A method of estimating the cost of tests in district
laboratories where the cost of reagents and other
supplies tends to be low can be found in the paper
of Houang.
4
Individual tests are costed as follows:
E
STIMATINGLABORATORY OPERATINGCOSTS
The following need to be included when estimating
the yearly variable and fixed costs of operating a
district laboratory:
Salaries of technical and auxiliary staff.
Cost of consummables including:
– chemicals, control materials, calibrants,
stains,
culture me dia and serological reagents,
ready-made reagents, diagnostic test kits,
reagent strip tests,
blood colle ction sets, collection bags, blood
grouping antisera and crossmatching
reagents,
filter paper and pH indic ator papers,
coverglasses, microscope slides, pipettor tips,
disinfe ctants, detergents, soap.
Resourcing of district laboratory practice
Careful analysis and budgeting of laboratory
costs and adequate government resourcing of
district laboratory practice are essential to main-
tain quality of service.
Budgets are more likely to be met when district
laboratory services:
contribute effectively to improving the
health status of the community.
can demonstrate reliability, efficiency, and
commitment to continuing improvement in
quality.
provide correct and useful data on
infectious diseases.
respond rapidly and responsibly when
epidemics occur.
1 Estimate the total cost of operating the laboratory
over a 1 year period (see previous text).
2 List the tests performed and total the number of
each test performed over the year.
3 Estimate the total workload units for each test
performed by multiplying the number of each
test performed by its laboratory workload unit
(LWU). Table 2.2 lists the LWU values frequently
assigned to laboratory tests performed in district
laboratories and the definition of LWU.
Example: If 523 WBCs are performed in 1 year,
the total LWU for WBCs is 523 6 3138
(where LWU for WBC is 6).
4 Add up the total LWU for each test to give the
yearly total workload for all the tests performed.
5 Divide the total laboratory operating cost by the
total workload to give the total unit cost.
Example: If the total operating cost is US$ 3131
and the total workload is 20913, the total unit
cost is 3131 20 913 US$ 0.15.
6 To obtain the individual cost of each test, multi-
ply the total unit cost by the unit value for each
test.
Examples: If total unit cost is US$ 0.15, a WBC
test would cost 0.15 6 US$ 0.90, a differen-
tial WBC would cost 0.15 11 U S$1.65, etc.
30 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.3
CONTROLLING LABORATORYCOSTS
The following can help to control laboratory costs
and minimize waste of laboratory resources:
If users of the laboratory select tests appropriately
as explained in subunit 2.2.
Advize medical staff and community health
workers which tests are more complex to per-
form and use expensive reagents or equipment
that is expensive to operate or maintain. Monitor
the use of expensive tests.
Standardize the technologies and equipment
used in district laboratories.
Purchase new equipment only after considering
whether it is appropriate (see subunit 4.1), and
whether maintenance costs can be afforded and
justified.
Train laboratory staff to work competently and
economically and use equipment correctly (see
subunit 1.3). Staff should know the costs of
reagents, controls, equipment, and replacement
parts.
Where appropriate, use reusable plasticware in-
stead of glassware. Good laboratory practice can
also help to reduce glassware breakages and
waste from spillages.
Before purchasing diagnostic test kits, check the
specifications, storage requirements, and shelf-
life of the stock and working reagents to make
sure the kits can be used cost-effectively.
Whenever possible use micro-techniques, par-
ticularly for clinical chemistry assays, to reduce
the volume of reagents, calibrants, and controls
needed. Make sure, however, that the total
volume of sample is sufficient for reading the
absorbance.
Whenever possible, batch test specimens, par-
Table 2.2 Laboratory workload unit (LWU)
values of tests commonly performed in district
laboratories
TEST LWU
Haemoglobin 5
WBC (white cell count) 6
Differential WBC 11
ESR (erythrocyte sedimentation rate) 5
PCV (packed cell volume) 3
Blood grouping: ABO 7
ABO and D 9
Basic urine chemistry (reagent strips tests) 3
Measurement of urine protein 8
Measurement of blood glucose 8
Measurement of blood urea 8
Pregnancy test (rapid test) 2
Rapid plasma reagin (RPR) 2
Ziehl Neelsen 12
Gram 8
Wet faecal preparation 10
Malaria thick film 10
Microscopial examinations for other blood
parasites 10
Definition: The laboratory workload unit (LWU) is a
standardized unit equal to 1 minute of technical,
clerical and aide time. The LWU values in this table
may require amending depending on the method
used to perform tests in different laboratories. The
LWU is not the same as how long it takes to perform
a particular test, e.g. ESR is assigned a LWU of 5 not
1 hour.
Note: Further information on how to estimate the
cost of running a district laboratory service can be
found in the paper of Mundy et al.
5
ticularly clinical chemistry assays, to economize
on the use of controls and calibrants and
maximize the use of working reagents. This
applies more to district hospital laboratory
practice.
Make basic easy-to-prepare reagents in the lab-
oratory instead of buying expensive ready-made
products.
Store chemicals and reagents correctly and take
care to avoid contaminating them.
Collect specimens and perform tests correctly to
avoid repeating a test unnecessarily. Supervize
adequately the work of trainees and new mem-
bers of staff.
Every three months review critically the emer-
gency and routine workload of the laboratory.
Review whether the layout of the laboratory
contributes to an efficient way of working.
Ensure laboratory buildings, particularly doors,
windows, and vents are secure and every
measure is taken to discourage break-ins and
theft of laboratory equipment and supplies.
Take precautions to avoid the unauthorized use
of laboratory property.
Keep accurate records of laboratory expendi-
tures.
PRIVATEDISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE
In some developing countries, severe government
under-resourcing for national laboratory services has
led to the growth of private laboratory practice.
Private laboratories may be able to perform tests that
are either temporarily or permanently unavailable at
the district hospital laboratory. For many in the com-
munity, however, the fees charged by the privately
run laboratories are unaffordable.
Where private laboratory practice is used to com-
pliment community district laboratory services,
health authorities have a responsibility to ensure
private laboratories:
are staffed by qualified registered laboratory
personnel with a medical officer in attendance,
do not permit laboratory staff to prescribe
drugs,
have appropriate facilities for the tests being
performed,
operate safely,
follow standard operating procedures with
adequate quality assurance,
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 31
2.3–2.4
display fees and make these known to patients
before performing investigations,
keep accurate accounts of income and expendi-
tures.
Most private laboratories do not perform essential
public health laboratory activities or disease
surveillance.
2.4 Quality assurance and
sources of error in district
laboratory practice
The necessity for total quality management in district
laboratory practice has been discussed in subunit 2.1
This subunit covers in detail how to ensure the qual-
ity of test results, i.e. quality assurance. The purpose
of quality assurance (QA) in laboratory practice is to
provide test results that are:
relevant
reliable and reproducible
timely
interpreted correctly.
QA includes all those activities both in and outside
the laboratory, performance standards, good labora-
tory practice, and management skills that are
required to achieve and maintain a quality service
and provide for continuing improvement.
Defining quality assurance (QA)
QA has been defined by WHO as the total
process whereby the quality of laboratory
reports can be guaranteed. It has been
summarized as the:
right result, at the
right time, on the
right specimen, from the
right patient, with result interpretation based
on
correct reference data, and at the
right price.
Quality control (QC)
The term quality control covers that part of
quality assurance which primarily concerns the
control of errors in the performance of tests and
verification of test results. QC must be practical,
achievable, and affordable.
Effective QA detects errors at an early stage
before they lead to incorrect test results. Laboratory
personnel need to be aware of the errors that can
occur when collecting specimens (pre-analytical
stage), testing specimens (analytical stage), reporting
and interpreting test results (post-analytical stage).
QA is an essential requirement of district laboratory
practice. Implementing QA requires:
Preparation and use of Standard Operating
Procedures (SOPs) with details of QC for all lab-
oratory tests and activities (see later text).
System for monitoring whether test results are
reaching those treating patients at an early
enough stage to influence clinical and public
health decision making.
Policies of work, i.e. decisions that are taken in
consultation with medical and nursing staff to
enable a laboratory to operate reliably, effec-
tively, and in harmony with the other depart-
ments of a hospital or units of a health centre.
Such policies should cover:
lab oratory hours and arrangements for
emergency testing of specimens outside of
normal working hours.
range and cost of tests to b e performed.
tests which c an be referred to a specialist
laboratory.
arrangements for the colle ction and trans-
port of routine and urgent specimens, and
their delivery, to the laboratory.
lab elling of specimens.
lab oratory request form and patient infor-
mation required.
time it t akes to perform tests, i.e. target turn-
around times.
reporting of routine and urgent tests and
delivery of reports.
re cording and storing of laboratory data.
health and s afety regulations.
STANDARDOPERATING PROCEDURES (SOPS)
SOPs, sometimes referred to as the local laboratory
bench manual, are required for the following
reasons:
To improve and maintain the quality of labora-
tory service to patients and identify problems
32 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.4
associated with poor work performance.
To provide laboratory staff with written instruc-
tions on how to perform tests consistently to an
acceptable standard in their laboratory.
To prevent changes in the performance of tests
which may occur when new members of staff
are appointed. SOPs also help to avoid short-cuts
being taken when performing tests.
To make clinical and epidemiological interpret-
ations of test results easier by standardizing
specimen collecting techniques, test methods,
and test reporting.
To provide written standardized techniques for
use in the training of laboratory personnel and
for potential publication in scientific journals.
To facilitate the preparation of a list and inventory
of essential reagents, chemicals and equipment.
To promote safe laboratory practice.
Important features of SOPS
SOPs must be:
Applicable and achievable in the
laboratory in which they will be used.
Clearly written and easy to understand and
follow.
Kept up to date using appropriate valid
technologies.
Preparing SOPs
SOPs must be written and implemented by a quali-
fied experienced laboratory officer, and followed
exactly by all members of staff.
For each SOP it is best to follow a similar format with
the information presented under separate headings.
Each SOP must be given a title and identification
number, and be dated and signed by an authorized
person.
A list of staff able to perform the test (unsupervized
and supervized) should be identified in the SOP.
There should also be an indication of the cost of the
test.
The following is a suggested layout for district
laboratory SOPs and appendices to be included in
the SOP Manual.
What to write under headings
VALUE OF TEST
State the main reason(s) for performing the test, i.e.
clinical and/or public health reasons (consult with
medical officer(s).
Example: To detect, identify, and quantify malaria
parasites in a person with suspected malaria?
(malaria test).
Indicate any relevant limitations of the test.
PRINCIPLE OF TEST
State briefly the technology used.
Examples: ‘Microscopical examination of Fields
stained thick blood film for malaria parasites (malaria
test) ...... or ...... chemical reagent strip test to detect
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 33
2.4
glucose in urine based on glucose oxidase reaction
(urine glucose test).
SPECIMEN
State the specimen required and how to collect it,
including:
– volume required,
– container and its preparation,
– use of any anticoagulant or stabilizer/
preservative,
– collection procedure (for adult and child) with
health and safety notes,
– how container should b e labelled,
– stability of spe cimen and requirements for
storage and transport,
time within which the specimen should reach the
laboratory.
Describe the checks to be made when specimen
and request form reach the laboratory and criteria
which may make it necessary to reject the specimen.
State if the specimen requires priority attention (e.g.
c.s.f).
EQUIPMENT
List the items of equipment needed to perform the
test. Main items of equipment such as a microscope,
centrifuge, colorimeter, incubator, water bath/heat
block, etc should be listed in a separate appendix
(e.g. Appendix B) at the back of the SOP Manual
and given a number which can be referenced in
each SOP (e.g. B/1, B/2 etc). The information to be
included in this appendix is described under
Appendix B (see later text).
REAGENTS/STAINS
List reagents, stains, reagent strips, etc needed to
perform the test. Include the reagents and stains in
a separate appendix at the back of the SOP Manual
e.g. Appendix A and give each a number which can
be referenced in the SOP (A/1, A/2, etc). The infor-
mation which needs to be included in this appendix
is described under Appendix A (see later text).
CONTROLS
List controls and source(s) to be used in the test, e.g.
positive and negative controls in serological tests,
control sera in clinical chemistry assays, positive and
negative controls in urine chemical tests, etc.
METHOD OF TEST
Describe in a numbered sequence how to perform
the test. For quantitative tests include details of cali-
bration, use of graph or factor, and calculations.
Describe how to control the procedure and also the
health and safety measures which apply. Full details
TITLE OF SOP
Authorized signature Number:
Date:
Staff able to perform test
Unsupervized: List names
Under supervision: List names
Cost of test
Example: Group 1 (high range), Group 2 (medium
range), Group 3 (low range)
Suggested headings(see later text for explanation)
VALUE OF TEST
PRINCIPLE OF TEST
SPECIMEN
EQUIPMENT
REAGENTS / STAINS
CONTROLS
METHOD OF TEST
REPORTING RESULTS / INTERPRETATION
SAFETY MEASURES
SOURCES OF ERROR
REFERENCES
Suggested appendices
The SOP Manual should include the following
appendices (see later text):
APPENDIX A, EQUIPMENT (Items: A/1, A/2, etc)
APPENDIX B, REAGENTS / STAINS (Items: B/1,
B/2, etc)
APPENDIX C, SAFETY (Information: C/1, C/2, etc)
ADDITIONAL NOTES
of safety procedures should be included in a separ-
ate Health and Safety appendix, e.g. Appendix C
with each procedure being given a number, (C/1,
C/2, etc) which can be referenced in the SOPs.
REPORTING RESULTS/INTERPRETATION
State how the test should be reported, including:
units to be used and format of reporting (explain
any abbreviations).
– accepted reference range for a quantit ative test.
– action to take if a result is seriously abnormal or
unexpected, e.g. need for verification, additional
testing, and, or immediate notification of the
result.
– give target turn-around time for issuing the
report (routine and urgent).
_ interpretation comments that should accompany
the test result.
SOURCES OF ERROR
Summarize the important and commonest causes of
an incorrect test result.
Examples: Sample not well mixed, smear too thick
for staining, inaccurate measurement (pipetting) of a
blood or serum sample, clots in anticoagulated
blood sample, air bubbles in the solution when
using a colorimeter or the sides of the cuvette not
being clean and dry, etc.
REFERENCES
List the main source(s) of the information contained
in the SOP, e.g. book, journal, published paper,
manufacturer’s leaflet, WHO guidelines or docu-
ment, etc.
What should be included in the appendices
APPENDIX A STAINS/REAGENTS
For each stain and reagent, the following information
is required:
– method of preparation and performance
testing/QC.
– any associated hazard, e.g. chemic al that is
flammable, toxic, harmful, irritant or corrosive.
– labelling specifications.
– storage requirements and st ability (‘shelf-life’).
– source(s) of chemicals and st ains, ordering infor-
mation (correct name/chemical formula and
where possible, catalogue number), and amount
of each chemical/stain, etc to be kept in stock.
APPENDIX B EQUIPMENT
For each item of equipment the following infor-
mation is required:
– name (including model number) and supplier.
34 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.4
– instructions for use, including any safety prec au-
tions.
– daily QC, e.g. cleaning, performance checks.
– details of how to replace components such as a
lamp, fuse, etc.
– maintenance schedule.
– replacement parts to be kept in stock with part
numbers and details of supplier(s).
– trouble-shooting and action to take if the equip-
ment fails.
APPENDIX C HEALTH AND SAFETY
This appendix should include:
– the safe handling and dispos al of specimens.
– decont amination procedures, e.g. use of
chemical agents (disinfectants), autoclaving, etc.
– safe use of chemic als.
– personal safety measures.
– action to take in the event of a fire.
– First Aid procedures.
Note: Some laboratories may prefer to include the above in a
separate Health and Safety Manual.
ADDITIONAL NOTES
Examples of other procedures and information
which are commonly included in a district laboratory
SOP Manual include, laboratory work policies cover-
ing laboratory operating times, emergency out-of-
hours testing arrangements, specimen collection
times, arrangements for the delivery of reports, and
also procedures relating to the packing and trans-
port of specimens to the public health laboratory or
other specialist laboratory.
Important: S OPs must be kept up to date and
reviewed at least annually. Any amendments must
be authorized, referenced, dated, signed, and
brought to the attention of all members of staff.
Users of the laboratory must also receive written
amendments to SOPs when these involve changes
in the ordering of tests, the collection of specimens
and the reporting of tests. No new test should be
introduced without an SOP.
SOURCES OF ERRORS I N DISTRICT LABORATORY
PRACTICE
As previously explained, the preparation and im-
plementation of SOPs will greatly assist in identify-
ing, monitoring, and minimizing errors that lead to
incorrect test results and the waste of resources.
Most errors are associated with:
Misidentifying a patient.
Collecting or storing a specimen incorrectly.
Technical imprecision and inaccuracy.
Reader variability (see subunit 2.2).
Adverse laboratory working conditions.
Misinterpreting test reports (see subunit 2.2).
Patient misidentification
In district laboratory practice, the misidentification of
a patient is mainly the result of:
Clerical errors or incomplete identification data,
e.g. when names are only used with no check of
an outpatient or inpatient identification number
at the time a specimen is collected.
Language difficulties when staff do not speak or
understand sufficiently the language or dialect
spoken by the patient.
Specimen containers that are incorrectly labelled
or when a specimen is misidentified on a ward
because it is first collected in an unlabelled con-
tainer such as a bedpan or sputum pot. Mistakes
can also occur when the writing on a label is
illegible or part erased.
No reliable check-in system when specimens
reach the laboratory to ensure that the patient
data on the request form is the same as that
written on the label of the specimen container.
Faulty specimens
Caused when:
A specimen is not correct, is inadequate, or col-
lected at an incorrect time.
The collection technique is not correct, e.g.
blood is t aken from an arm in which an
intravenous (IV) infusion is running.
a wet ne edle and syringe are used to collect
a blood specimen, resulting in haemolysis of
the red cells.
A container has not been cleaned properly or
dried before being reused, does not contain the
correct anticoagulant or preservative, or is not
sterile when it should be.
The container cap is loose resulting in loss, evap-
oration, or contamination of the specimen.
A specimen is unsuitable for testing because it
has been stored incorrectly, has been left for too
long a period in an outpatient clinic, or is too
long in transit before it reaches the laboratory.
Specimens, particularly blood films are not
protected from insects, dust, or direct sunlight.
A specimen contains drugs, herbal medicines, or
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 35
2.4
other substances which can interfere with the
performance of a test.
There is no inspection of specimens when they
reach the laboratory.
Imprecision and inaccuracy
Reliable test results depend on laboratory staff keep-
ing errors of imprecision and inaccuracy to a mini-
mum by good laboratory practice and quality
control. Consistently reliable results depend on the
early detection and correction of errors.
Errors of imprecision
Precision is a measure of reproducibility. Errors of impreci-
sion are often referred to as errors of scatter because they are
irregular, or random. Results differ from the correct result by
varying amounts as explained in subunit 6.2.
Errors of inaccuracy
Accuracy is defined as the closeness of agreement between a
test result and the accepted true value. Errors of inaccuracy
are often referred to as errors of bias because they are consis-
tent, or systematic. All the test results differ from their correct
result by approximately the same amount as explained in
subunit 6.2.
Common causes of imprecision in district laboratory
practice
The following are the commonest causes of
inconsistent random errors:
Incorrect and variable pipetting and dispensing
caused when:
pipetting and dispensing te chniques are
poor due to inadequate training, no
supervision of trainees, or careless working.
pipettes with chippe d ends or unclear
markings are used.
pipette fillers are difficult to use.
automatic pipettors and dispensers are not
used correctly or pipettor tips are not ade-
quately cleaned and dried before reuse
(where reuse is possible).
Inadequate mixing of sample with reagents.
Samples are not incubated consistently where
incubation of tests is required.
Glassware or plasticware is not clean or dried
completely before reuse.
Equipment malfunction caused when:
lab oratory staff are not trained in the correct
use and maintenance of equipment.
– instrument readings fluctuate due to
unstable power supplies and the equipment
is not fitted with a voltage stabilizer.
dirty or finger-marke d cuvettes are used in
colorimeters or the sample contains air
bubbles.
in hot humid climates, the glass surfaces of
lenses and filters become damaged when
not protected from fungal growth.
b attery operated equipment performs errati-
cally because the battery is not sufficiently
charged.
Incomplete removal of interfering substances
such as red cells when performing serum assays.
Laboratory staff prepare a smear that is too thick
for direct microscopical examination or subse-
quent staining.
Incorrect reporting of microscopical preparations
and lack of standardization in reporting.
Common causes of inaccuracy in district laboratory
practice
The following are the commonest causes of consis-
tent systematic errors:
Incorrect or infrequent calibration of a test
method or quantitative tests being read at an
incorrect wavelength (incorrect filter used).
Using an automatic pipettor set at an incorrect
volume or one that has been calibrated wrongly.
Use of control sera that has been wrongly
prepared, incorrectly stored, or used beyond its
expiry date.
Consistent calculation error.
Incubating samples at an incorrect temperature
due to the temperature of a waterbath or heat
block being wrongly set and not checked.
Use of unsatisfactory reagents caused when:
chemic al reagents and stains are not pre-
pared correctly according to SOPs.
the quality of water use d in the preparation
of reagents is unsuitable.
reagents are not prepare d from sufficiently
pure chemicals.
new b atches of reagents are not tested prior
to being used and no controls are used to
check the performance of working reagents.
reagents are use d beyond their expiry date
without being adequately controlled.
temperature sensitive reagents deteriorate
because they are not stored at the correct
temperature, are frequently removed from
the refrigerator into a hot environment, or
the refrigerator stops working due to a
36 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.4
power failure or running out of gas or
kerosene.
a reagent b ecomes contaminated when a
dirty or wet pipette is used.
light sensitive reagents b ecome unfit for use
because they are not stored in opaque
containers and protected from light.
dry, moisture-sensitive reagents and strip
tests deteriorate due to their frequent use in
conditions of high relative humidity, or when
the container is not tightly closed after use
and no desiccant is enclosed.
st ains are used without controls, are not
filtered when indicated, or absorb moisture
and become unfit for use, e.g. alcoholic
Romanowsky stock stains.
Staff reporting microscopical preparations
incorrectly due to inadequate training with no
control preparations being used, particularly to
check the ability of staff to report:
Gram st ained smears.
Ziehl-Ne elsen stained smears.
Thick and thin staine d blood films.
Cerebrospinal fluid, urine and fae cal
preparations.
Note: Measuring and controlling impre cision and
inaccuracy in quantitative serum assays are
described in detail in subunit 6.2.
Mistakes made by laboratory staff due to
adverse working conditions
Caused when:
The workload is too high or too low:
Workload capacity of a laboratory
The workload must be matched to the number of staff and
their experience, and to the size of the laboratory and its
facilities. Workload is usually measured in terms of time
required for a test to be completed. When workload is ex-
cessive, the testing of specimens becomes unreliable and
safety measures tend to be ignored. Too little work can
also lead to unreliable test results due to lack of concen-
tration.
The laboratory is small with insufficient or poorly
lit working areas and is not sufficiently ventilated
or screened from direct sunlight.
Laboratory staff become professionally isolated
and lack motivation when they receive little
support and encouragement.
There are too many interruptions or when there
is excessive noise from nearby OPD waiting
areas or radios.
When there are too many urgent test requests.
District hospital laboratory staff become fatigued
or sick (e.g. with malaria) due to many night
emergency calls.
Note: Monitoring the workload and working
conditions of district laboratory personnel forms an
integral part of health and safety and the total
quality management of district laboratory services.
EXTERNAL QUALITY ASSE SSMENT (E QA)
Although steps may be taken in a laboratory to en-
sure test results are reliable, an objective system of
assessing a laboratory’s ability to do this to a satis-
factory standard is recommended, i.e. an external
quality assessment (EQA) scheme.
Participation in external quality assessment
schemes should always be regarded as additional to
internal quality control. EQA must never be a sub-
stitute for internal QC because it can only assess
past performance when test results have already
been reported and acted on.
EQA for outreach laboratories
The district laboratory coordinator, with the assist-
ance of the senior district hospital laboratory officer,
should implement a basic EQA scheme for outreach
laboratories covering the main tests performed, par-
ticularly those where errors are more likely to occur
such as the reporting of microscopical preparations,
measurement of haemoglobin, and testing of urine.
For most outreach laboratories, EQA will be most
practically implemented during the regular visit of
the district laboratory coordinator. This will give the
opportunity for errors to be investigated on-site and
corrected rapidly.
EQA for the district hospital laboratory
Comprehensive EQA schemes in which the results
from different district hospital laboratories are
compared objectively are not yet operating in most
tropical and developing countries due to lack of
commitment, inadequate resourcing, too few labora-
tory personnel trained in QA, and difficulties in
transporting and mailing pathological specimens.
In recent years, the World Health Organization
has issued guidelines on the role of laboratory EQA
schemes and how developing countries can
participate in WHO International External Quality
Assessment Schemes (IEQASs).
6
In the absence of national EQA schemes, the dis-
trict laboratory coordinator should prepare control
materials for use in district hospital laboratories,
particularly control preparations for microscopical
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 37
2.4–2.5
investigations, control serum for clinical chemistry
assays, control cultures for microbiology, control
blood for checking the measurement of haemoglo-
bin and other haematology tests, and controls for
testing the competence of staff in blood typing and
compatibility testing.
The district laboratory coordinator should moni-
tor regularly whether SOPs and quality control pro-
cedures are being implemented correctly in the
district hospital laboratory and also the quality and
consistency of reporting and recording test results.
Correcting errors associated with poor
work performance
Most of the errors resulting in incorrect test re-
sults in district laboratories can be resolved by:
Using SOPs with adequate QC and
reference materials.
Improving working practices and laboratory
management.
Monitoring laboratory working conditions
and workload.
Supporting district laboratory personnel, i.e.
regular visits by the district laboratory
coordinator.
Organizing an effective district quality
assessment scheme.
Changing to competency-based training of
laboratory personnel and implementing
performance assessment and continuing
education of district laboratory staff.
Improving communication between labora-
tory staff and those requesting laboratory
tests and interpreting test results.
2.5 SI units
Following World Health Organization recommen-
dations, SI units (Système International d’Unités) are
used in this publication:
in test methods,
preparation of reagents,
reporting of test results.
The International System of Units has been devel-
oped and agreed internationally. It overcomes
language barriers, enabling an exchange of health
information within a country and between nations to
be made without the misunderstandings which arise
when each country, or even a separate hospital
within a country, uses its own units of measurement
for reporting tests. It is therefore important for health
authorities and laboratories to adopt SI units.
SI BASE UNITS
The International System of Units is based on the
metre-kilogram-second system and replaces both
the foot-pound-second (Imperial) system and the
centimetre-gram-second (cgs) system.
The seven SI base units from which all the other
units are derived are as follows:
SI base units Symbol Quantity measured
metre m length
kilogram kg mass
second s time
mole mol amount of substance
ampere A electric current
kelvin K temperature
candela cd luminous intensity
SI DERIVEDUNITS
SI derived units consist of combinations of base
units:
SI derived unit Symbol Quantity measured
square metre m
2
area
cubic metre m
3
volume
metre per second m/s speed
Special names have been given to those derived
units with complex base combinations:
Name derived unit Symbol Quantity measured
Hertz Hz frequency
joule J energy, quantity of heat
newton N force
pascal Pa pressure
watt W power
volt V electric potential difference
degree Celsius °C Celsius temperature
SI UNIT PREFIXES
To enable the measurement of quantities larger or
smaller than the base units or derived units, the SI
38 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.5
Unit System also includes a set of prefixes. The use
of a prefix makes a unit larger or smaller.
Example
If the prefix milli (m) is put in front of the metre this
would indicate that the unit should be divided by a
thousand, i.e. 10
3
. The way of expressing this
would be 10
3
m, or mm.
Ifhowever the prefix kilo (k)were used this would
indicate that theunit should be multiplied by a thou-
sand, i.e.10
3
.This would be expressed 10
3
m,or km.
The range of SI unit prefixes commonly used in
laboratory work are listed as follows:
Prefix Symbol Function
DIVIDE BY:
deci d 10
1
10
centi c 10
2
100
milli m 10
3
1000
micro 10
6
1000 000
nano n 10
9
1000 000000
pico p 10
12
1000 000000 000
femto f 10
15
1000 000000 000000
MULTIPLY BY:
kilo k 10
3
1000
VOLUME: LITRE (L OR l)
The SI derived unit of volume is the cubic metre
(m
3
). Because this is such a large unit, the litre (l or
L) although not an SI unit, has been recommended
for use in the laboratory.
Volume measurements are made in litres or multi-
ples and submultiples of the litre, e.g. dl (10
1
l),
ml (10
3
l), l (10
6
l).
One litre is therefore equivalent to 10 dl,
1000 ml or 1000000 l. One dl is e quivalent to
100 ml, and 1 ml to 1000 l.
Old unit SI unit
100 ml dl
cc ml or cm
3
lambda l
—nl
lpl
Useful volume table
1 dl 10
1
l (0.1 l) or 100 cm
3
, formerly 100 ml
1 ml 10
3
(0.001 l) or 1 000 l
1 l 10
6
(0.000 001 l or 1 mm
3
)
1 nl 10
9
l (0.000 000 001 l)
1 pl 10
12
l (0.000 000 000 001 l)
1 fl 10
15
1 l 10 dl
1 000 ml
1 000 000 l
1 000 000 000 nl
1 pint 0.568 l
1 l 1.760 pints or 0.22 gallons
WEIGHT: GRAM (g)
The kilogram (kg) is the SI unit for mass and the
gram (g) is the working unit.
Formerly the gram (g) was written gramme, or gm.
Mass measurements are made in grams or in multi-
ples and submultiples of the gram, e.g. mg (10
3
g),
g (10
6
g), ng (10
9
g), pg (10
12
g).
One g is therefore equivalent to 1000 mg,
1000 000 g, or 1000 000000 ng. One mg is
equivalent to 1000 g.
Old unit SI unit
k, kilogramme kg
gm, gramme g
mgm mg
gamma g
mug ng
gpg
Useful weight table
1 kg 10
3
g (1 000 g)
1 mg 10
3
g (0.001 g) or 1 000 g
1 g 10
6
g (0.000 001 g)
1 ng 10
9
g (0.000 000 001 g)
1 pg 10
12
g (0.000 000 000 001 g)
1 g 1 000 mg
1 000 000 g
1 000 000 000 ng
1 000 000 000 000 pg
1 kg 2.205 lb
Tests now reported in g/l include: albumin, total pro-
tein, haemoglobin (although dl is still used), mean
cell haemoglobin concentration.
LENGTH: METRE (m)
The SI unit for length is the metre (m) and mea-
surements of length are made in metres or in mm
(10
3
m), m (10
6
m), nm (10
9
m).
One m is therefore equivalent to 1000 mm or
1000 000 m and 1 mm is equivalent to 1000 m
or 1000 000 nm.
Old unit SI unit
m nm
(micron) m
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 39
2.5
Useful length table
1 dm 10
1
m (0.1 m)
1 cm 10
2
m (0.01 m), 10 mm, 10 000 m
1 mm 10
3
m (0.001 m), 1 000 m
1 m 10
6
m (0.000 001 m)
1 nm 10
9
m (0.000 000 001 m)
1 km 1 000 m (10
3
m)
1 m 10 d m
100 cm
1 000 mm
1 000 000 m
1 000 000 000 nm
1 m 3.281 feet
1 km 0.62 137 mile
1 inch 2.54 cm
AMOUNT OF SUBSTANCE: MOLE (mol)
The mole (mol) is the SI unit for amount of sub-
stance and measurements of the amounts of sub-
stances are made in moles, or in mmol (10
3
mol),
mol (10
6
mol), or nmol (10
9
mol).
One mol is therefore equivalent to 1 000 mmol,
1 000 000 mol, or 1 000 000 000 nmol. One
mmol/l is equivalent to 1 000 mol/l.
Formerly, the results of tests expressed in mmol/l
or mol/l were expressed in mg/100 ml or g/100
ml. The formula used to convert mg/100 ml to
mmol/l is as follows:
mmol/l
Where the molecular weight of a substance cannot
be accurately determined (e.g. albumin), results are
expressed in g/l.
Old unit SI unit
M mol
mEq mmol
M mol
nM nmol
Useful amount of substance table
1 mmol 10
3
mol (0.001 mol), 1 000 mol
1 mol 10
6
mol (0.000 001 mol), 1 000 nmol
1 nmol 10
9
mol (0.000 000 001 mol)
1 mol 1 000 mmol
1 000 000 mol
1 000 000 000 nmol
Tests reported in nmol/l, mol/l, mmol/l include:
nmol/l: thyroxine
mol/l: bilirubin, creatinine, iron
mmol/l: calcium, glucose, urea, cholesterol, sodium,
potassium
mg/100 ml 10

molecular weight of substance
Mole per litre solutions (mol/l)
A mole per litre (mol/l) solution contains one mole
of solute dissolved in and made up to 1 litre with
solvent.
Mole
A mole is defined as the amount of substance of a system
which contains as many elementary units (atoms, molecules,
or ions) as there are carbon atoms in 0.012 kg of the pure
nuclide carbon12 (
12
C).
To avoid confusion, mole per litre solutions should
not be referred to as molar or M solutions. The in-
ternationally agreed meaning of the word molar as
used in chemistry is ‘divided by amount of sub-
stance’, i.e. divided by mole. Molar cannot be
applied therefore to mole per litre solutions as these
refer to mole divided by litre (mol/l). The term
molarity should be discontinued.
Conversion of a normal solution into a mol/l solution
To change a normal solution into a mol/l solution,
use the formula:
mol/l solution
INTERNATIONALUNIT (U)
This unit is used to express catalytic enzyme activity
corresponding to mol/minutes. Units for measur-
ing enzyme activity have in the past been given the
names of the person who developed the different
techniques, e.g. Somogyi, King-Armstrong, Bessey-
Lowry, Reitman-Frankel, and Karmen. In an attempt
to standardize the reporting of enzyme activity a unit
of measurement has been introduced called the
International Unit (U)
International Unit
An International Unit of enzyme activity is that
amount of enzyme which under defined assay con-
ditions will catalyze the conversion of 1 mol of
substrate per minute. Results are expressed in
International Units per litre (U/l).
In accordance with this definition the assay con-
ditions for enzyme analysis must be specified (see
subunit 6.2).
Enzyme activities now expressed in U/l include
alkaline phosphatase and aspartate aminotransferase.
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE
The SI unit used for measuring pressure is the
pascal (Pa).
Normality of solution

Valence of substance
40 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.5–2.6
Approximate conversions
kPa
lb/sq inch 6.895 kPa
Temperature
The SI unit for measuring Celsius temperature is
degrees Celsius (°C).
Useful conversions
To convert °C to °F:
multiply by 9, divide by 5, and add 32.
To convert °F to °C:
subtract 32, multiply by 5, and divide by 9.
0°C 32°F
10° C 52°F
20°C 68°F
30°C 86°F
36.9°C 98.4°F
40°C 104°F
50°C 122°F
100°C 212° F
2.6 Guidelines for preparing
stains and chemical reagents
As discussed in subunit 2.4, preparing and storing
reagents incorrectly are important causes of unreli-
able test results. This subunit provides guidelines on
the correct preparation of stains and chemical
reagents to ensure quality of work and prevent
waste of resources.
Errors in the preparation of stains and
reagents
Most errors that occur in the preparation of stains
and reagents are due to:
Incorrect preparation techniques.
Calculating incorrectly the weight or volumes of
constituents.
Making dilution errors.
Important: Following the preparation of a stain or
chemical reagent, its performance must be checked
before it is put into routine use. Standard operating
procedures must be implemented for the prep-
aration, control, and safety of reagents used in
district laboratories.
mmHg 2

15
Health and safety: Precautions that need to be
taken when using Harmful, Irritant, Toxic, Corrosive,
and Flammable chemic als are described in subunit
3.5.
PREPARATIONTECHNIQUE
When preparing a solution decide whether the sol-
ution requires an accurate volumetric preparation,
e.g. a calibrant (standard), or a less accurate method
of preparation, e.g. a stain.
Preparing accurate solutions
Use a balance of sufficient sensitivity (see 4.5).
Weigh the chemical as accurately as possible.
The chemical should be of an analytical reagent
grade. Hygroscopic and deliquescent chemicals
need to be weighed rapidly.
Analytical reagents
Errors due to the use of impure chemicals can be avoided by
purchasing chemicals that are labelled Analar, Univar, AR
(Analytical Reagent), or GR (Guaranteed Reagent). LG
(Laboratory Grade) reagents are of lower purity but may be
suitable for some purposes. Technical and Industrial grade
chemicals, although less expensive, must not be used to pre-
pare calibrants or any reagent which requires a pure chemical.
Use calibrated, chemically clean glassware.
Read carefully the graduation marks and other
information on flasks and pipettes, for example
check whether a pipette is of the containing (rins-
ing-out) type or of the delivery (non-rinsing-out)
type. It is best to use a delivery type. Instructions
when using a pipettor can be found in subunit
4.6.
Use a funnel to transfer the chemical from the
weighing container to a volumetric flask. Wash
any chemical remaining in the container into the
flask with a little of the solvent.
Make the solution up to its final volume. If warm,
make up to volume only when the solution has
cooled to the temperature used to graduate the
flask (written on the flask).
To avoid over-shooting the graduation mark, use
a Pasteur pipette or wash-bottle to add the final
volume of solvent to the flask.
Make sure the bottom of the meniscus of the
fluid is on the graduation mark when viewed at
eye level (see Fig. 2.5).
Mix the solution well by inverting the flask at
least twenty times.
Store reagents in completely clean containers
that have leak-proof airtight screw-caps or stop-
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 41
2.6
pers. Use brown bottles or opaque plastic con-
tainers for storing light sensitive reagents. Before
transferring a solution to its storage container,
first rinse out the container with a little of the
solution.
Label the container clearly with a water-proof
marker. Include the full name of the reagent, its
concentration, date of preparation and if relevant
its expiry date. If it requires refrigeration, state
‘Store at 2–8°C’. Protect the label by covering it
with clear adhesive tape. If a reagent is
Harmful, Irritant, Toxic, Corrosive, or Flammable,
indicate this on the container label (see subunit
3.5).
Protect all reagents from sunlight and heat. Store
light sensitive reagents and stock solutions of
stains in the dark.
Preparation of calibrating solutions (standards)
When preparing calibrants the following are
important:
Always use pure chemicals. The use of impure
low grade chemicals can lead to serious errors in
test results.
Avoid weighing a very small quantity of a cali-
brant substance. Instead prepare a concentrated
stock solution which can be diluted to make
working solutions.
Use good quality distilled water. Electrolyte
calibrants require deionized water.
Use calibrated glassware and a volumetric
technique as described previously.
Use a control serum to check the performance of
the calibrant solutions.
Whenever possible, calibrants should be prepared
and standardized in a regional or control laboratory
and distributed with instructions for use to district
laboratories.
Meniscus of fluid
on the graduation
mark
Neck of Flask enlarged
Fig. 2.5 How to read the level of a fluid
Preparing stains
There is no need to use expensive volumetric glass-
ware when preparing stains.
Weigh the dye in a small container and transfer
the weighed dye direct to a leak-proof storage
container, preferably a brown bottle.
Add any other ingredients and the volume of sol-
vent as stated in the method of preparation, and
mix well. Adding a few glass beads will help the
dye to dissolve more quickly. For some stains
heat can be used to dissolve the dye (this will be
stated in the method of preparation).
Note: Instead of measuring the volume of sol-
vent each time the stain is prepared, it is more
practical to mark the side of the container with
the volume which needs to be added.
Transfer part of the stain to a stain dispensing
container, filtering it if required. Always use dis-
pensing containers with tops that can be closed
when not in use.
Label the container in a similar way to that
described previously.
Store as instructed in the method of preparation.
Always protect stock containers of stain from
direct sunlight.
Water used in preparing solutions and stains
For all the reagents described in Appendix 1, de-
ionized water can be used instead of distilled water.
For most stains and reagents not used in clinical
chemistry tests, boiled filtered rain water or boiled
water filtered through a Sterasyl c andle filter (see
subunit 4.4) can be used if distilled or deionized
water is not available.
Note: A method of preparing chemically pure water
in district laboratories is described in subunit 4.4.
Guidelines for handling chemicals and
reagents
Handle chemicals and reagents with care par-
ticularly those that are Flammable, Toxic, Harmful,
Irritant, Corrosive (see subunit 3.5). Wear appro-
priate protective clothing.
Always read the health and safety information on
the labels of containers.
Do not mouth-pipette reagents. Instead, use a
pipette filler, automatic dispenser or pipettor.
Always check that an opened bottle of chemical
is completely finished before starting a new one.
Keep containers tightly closed.
Do not return excess chemical to a stock bottle.
42 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.6
Make sure all chemicals and reagents are
labelled clearly.
Store chemicals and reagents correctly (see sub-
unit 3.5).
Deliquescent chemicals
Chemicals such as calcium chloride, potassium carbonate,
phenol, and sodium hydroxide are very soluble in water and
become moist when exposed to damp air. They become dis-
solved in the moisture and go on taking in moisture until the
vapour pressure of the solution equals the pressure of the
water in the atmosphere. Such chemicals are said to be deli-
quescent. They can be used as drying agents (desiccants) in
desiccators.
Hygroscopic chemicals
A substance which absorbs water from the air but does not
dissolve in the water it absorbs is referred to as hygroscopic,
e.g. sodium carbonate.
CALCULATINGCORRECTLY
In the preparation of solutions, calculation errors
commonly occur due to:
Simple errors in calculating amounts and vol-
umes, most of which can be prevented by
routinely rechecking the calculations.
Not using the correct formula when preparing a
mol/l solution.
Not using the correct formula when diluting a
solution.
Useful table
1 g 1000 mg 1 litre 1 000 ml
1 g 1000 000 g1 ml1 000 l
0.1 g 100 mg 1 mol 1 000 mmol
0.01 g 10 mg 1 mol 1 000 000 mol
1000 g 1 mg 1 mmol 1000 mol
Preparing mol/l solutions
Based on the fact that chemicals interact in relation
to their molecular masses it is recommended that
the concentration of solutions be expressed in terms
of the number of moles of solute per litre of solution
(see subunit 2.5 which describes the use of SI units).
Only when the relative molecular mass of a sub-
stance is not known, should the concentration of
such a substance in solution be expressed in terms
of mass (weight) concentration, i.e. grams or
milligrams per litre (per 100 ml should be discontin-
ued).
To prepare a mol/l solution, use the following
formula:
Required mol/l solution Molecular mass of substance
Number of grams to be dissolved in 1 litre of solution.
When calculating the molecular mass of a chemical
it is important to check whether it contains water of
crystallization. For example, hydrated copper sul-
phate (blue) has a formula of CuSO
4
·5H
2
O, which
means it contains 5 molecules of water per mole-
cule. The molecular masses of some hydrated and
anhydrous (without water of crystallization) chemi-
cals are listed in Appendix III.
EXAMPLES
To make 1 litre of sodium chloride (NaCl), 1 mol/l:
Required mol/l concentration 1
Molecular mass of NaCl 58.44
Therefore 1 litre NaCl, 1 mol/l contains:
1 58.44 58.44 g of the chemical dissolved
in 1 litre of solvent.
Note: When writing mol/l solutions, the concentration is
written after the name of the substance.
To make 1 litre of sodium chloride (NaCl), 0.15
mol/l (physiological saline):
Required mol/l concentration 0.15
Molecular mass of NaCl 58.44
Therefore 1 litre NaCl, 0.15 mol/l cont ains:
0.15 58.44 8.77 g of the chemical dissolved
in 1 litre of solvent.
To make 50 ml of sodium chloride (NaCl), 0.15
mol/l (physiological saline):
Required mol/l concentration 0.15
Molecular mass of NaCl 58.44
Therefore 50 ml NaCl, 0.15 mol/l cont ains:
0.438 g of NaCl
dissolved in 50 ml of
solvent.
Note:In some publications the decimal point is written as
a comma, e.g. 0.15 would be written as 0,15.
Formula to convert a percentage solution to a
mol/l solution
To change a percentage solution into a mol/l sol-
ution, use the formula:
mol/l solution
EXAMPLES
To convert a 4% w/v sodium hydroxide (NaOH)
solution into a mol/l solution:
Gram % solution 4
Molecular mass of NaOH 40
Conversion to mol/l: 1
Therefore 4% w/v NaOH is equivalent to a
1 mol/l NaOH solution.
4 10
40
g% (w/v) solution 10

molecular mass of substance
0.15 58.44 50

1 000
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 43
2.6
To convert a 0.9% w/v sodium chloride (NaCl)
into a mol/l solution:
Gram % solution 0.9
Molecular mass of NaCl 58.44
Conversion to mol/l: 0.15
Therefore 0.9% w/v NaCl is equivalent to a
0.15 mol/l NaCl solution.
Conversion of a normal solution into a mol/l
solution
To change a normal solution into a mol/l solution
use the formula:
mol/l solution
EXAMPLES
To convert 0.1 N (N /10) hydrochloric acid (HCl)
into a mol/l solution:
Normality of solution 0.1
Valence of Cl (in HCl) 1
Conversion to mol/l: 0.1
Therefore 0.1 N HCl is equivalent to
0.1 mol/l HCl solution.
To convert 1 N sodium carbonate (Na
2
CO
3
) into
a mol/l solution:
Normality of solution 1
Valence of CO
3

(in Na
2
CO
3
) 2
Conversion to mol/l: 0.5
Therefore 1 N Na
2
CO
3
is equivalent to
0.5 mol/l Na
2
CO
3
solution.
Note: The relative molecular masses (molecular
weights) of some of the more commonly used sub-
stances and the atomic masses and valencies of
some of the elements, are listed in Appendix III.
DILUTING CORR ECTLY
In the laboratory it is frequently necessary to dilute
solutions and body fluids. To dilute a solution or
body fluid means to reduce its concentration. A
weaker solution can be made from a stronger
solution by using the following formula:
Volume (ml) of stronger solution required
where:
C Concentration of solution required
V Volume of solution required
S Strength of the stronger solution
C V
S
1
2
0.1
1
Normality of solution

Valence of substance
0.9 10

58.44
EXAMPLES
To make 500 ml sodium hydroxide (NaOH), 0.25
mol/l from a 0.4 mol/l solution:
C 0.25 mol/l, V 500 ml, S 0.4 mol/l
ml of stronger solution required:
312.5
Therefore, measure 312.5 ml NaO H, 0.4 mol/l,
and make up to 500 ml with distilled water.
To make 1 litre hydrochloric acid (HCl), 0.01 mol/l
from a 1 mol/l solution:
C 0.01 mol/l, V 1 litre, S 1 mol/l
ml of stronger solution required:
10
Therefore, measure 10 ml HCl, 1 mol/l, and
make up to 1 litre with distilled water.
To make 100 ml glucose, 3 mmol/l in 1 g/l ben-
zoic acid from glucose 100 mmol/l solution:
C 3 mmol/l, V 100 ml, S 100 mmol/l
ml of stronger solution required:
3
Therefore, measure 3 ml of glucose, 100 mmol/l,
and make up to 100 ml with 1 g/l benzoic acid.
To make 500 ml sulphuric acid (H
2
SO
4
), 0.33
mol/l from concentrated sulphuric acid which has
an approximate substance concentration of 18
mol/l:
C 0.33 mol/l, V 500 ml, S 18 mol/l
ml of stronger solution required:
9.2
Therefore, measure 9.2 ml concentrated H
2
SO
4
,
and slowly add it to about 250 ml of distilled
water in a volumetric flask. Make up to 500 ml
with distilled water.
Diluting body fluids
To prepare a dilution or series of dilutions of a body
fluid:
EXAMPLES
To make 8 ml of a 1 in 20 dilution of blood:
Volume of blood required: 0.4 ml
Therefore, to prepare 8 ml of a 1 in 20 dilution,
add 0.4 ml of blood to 7.6 ml of diluting fluid.
To make 4 ml of a 1 in 2 dilution of serum in
physiological saline:
8
20
0.33 500

18
3 100
100
0.01 1 000

1
0.25 500

0.4
44 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.6
Volume of serum required: 2.0 ml
Therefore, to prepare 4 ml of a 1 in 2 dilution,
add 2 ml of serum to 2 ml of physiological saline.
Calculating the dilution of a body fluid
To calculate the dilution of a body fluid:
EXAMPLES
Calculate the dilution of blood when using 50 l
(0.05 ml) of blood and 950 l (0.95 ml) of
diluting fluid:
Total volume of body fluid and diluting fluid:
50 950 1 000 l
Therefore, dilution of blood: 20
i.e. 1 in 20 dilution.
Calculate the dilution of urine using 0.5 ml of urine
and 8.5 ml of diluting fluid (physiological saline):
Total volume of urine and diluting fluid:
8.5 0.5 9.0 ml
Therefore, dilution of urine: 18
i.e. 1 in 18 dilution.
PROPERTIESOF COMMONLYUSED ACIDS AND BASES
An acid is a substance that liberates hydrogen ions
in solution and acts as a proton donor (donating H
).
Acids turn litmus red, and react with carbonates
to produce the gas carbon dioxide. When reacted
with a base, an acid produces a salt and water. Most
acids are corrosive.
Sulphuric acid, nitric acid, and hydrochloric acid
are referred to as strong acids because they ionize
almost completely in solution with very few intact
molecules of the acid remaining. Ionization is the
dissociation of a substance in solution into electrically
charged atoms known as ions. Lactic acid and glacial
acetic acid are referred to as weak acids, because
they ionize very little in solution.
The properties of the commonly used acids are
as follows:
Sulphuric acid (H
2
SO
4
): Has a relative density of
1.840, molecular mass 98.08, and concentration
95–97% by weight.
It is very corrosive, viscous, oily, and reacts vio-
lently with water (hygroscopic). See also subunit 3.5.
Hydrochloric acid (HCl): Has a relative density of
1.190 and molecular mass 36.46. The concentrated
acid contains 37% by weight of the gas hydrogen
9.0
0.5
1 000
50
4
2
chloride. It is fuming and corrosive. See also subunit
3.5.
Nitric acid (HNO
3
): Has a relative density of 1.510,
molecular mass 63.01, and concentration about 99%
by weight. It is fuming, corrosive, stains the skin
yellow-brown, and is a powerful oxidizing agent. See
also subunit 3.5.
Approximate molarity (mol/l) of some acids
Concentrated acid Approx. mol/l
Acetic acid, glacial, 99.6% w/w: 17.50
Hydrochloric acid, 1.16, 32% w/w: 10.20
1.18, 36% w/w: 11.65
Nitric acid, 1.42, 70% w/w: 15.80
Sulphuric acid, 1.84, 97% w/w: 18.00
To make approx. 1 mol/l solutions from concentrated acids
Concentrated acid ml diluted to 1 litre
Acetic acid, (glacial), 99.6% w/w 58 ml
Hydrochloric acid, 32% w/w 98 ml
36% w/w 86 ml
Nitric acid, 70%, w/w 63 ml
Sulphuric acid, 97% w/w 56 ml
BASES
A base is a substance that liberates hydroxide ions in
solution and can accept a proton.
Alkaline solutions have a soapy feel, turn litmus
blue, and react with an acid to form a salt and water.
The common bases include oxides and hydrox-
ides of metals such as sodium, potassium, calcium,
lead, iron, and copper. The oxides of potassium,
sodium, and calcium dissolve in water to form
alkalis.
Sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide are
referred to as strong alkalis because they dissociate
completely into cations and hydroxide ions in water.
Sodium hydroxide is the most commonly used
alkali in district laboratories.
Sodium hydroxide (NaOH)
NaOH (supplied as pellets) is a corrosive deliques-
cent chemical with a molecular mass of 40.0.
When preparing sodium hydroxide solutions, it is
necessary to dissolve small amounts of pellets at a
time in water to avoid the production of excessive
heat.
Preparation of NaOH solutions of different molarities
NaOH required in 1 litre Approx. mol/l
4 g 0.12
10 g 0.25
16 g 0.42
40 g 1.25
200 g 5.25
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 45
2.6
Note:The volumes must be made up to 1 litre after the
solutions have cooled to room temperature.
ACID BASE REACTION S
Examples of chemical reactions involving acids and
bases include:
Acid Base Salt Water
H
Cl
Na
OH
Na
Cl
H
2
O
Hydrochloric Sodium Sodium Water
acid hydroxide chloride
CH
3
COO
H
Na
OH
CH
3
COO
Na
H
2
O
Acetic Sodium Sodium Water
acid hydroxide acetate
PK OF ACIDS AND BASES
The strength of an acid or base is determined by its
pK which is defined as the negative logarithm (to the
base 10) of the ionization constant (K):
pKlog
10
K
For example, a strong acid has a low pK value
whereas a weak acid has a high pK. The higher the
pK value the weaker the acid.
Neutralization reactions
The process of adding an acid to a base, or a base to an acid,
to give a neutral solution consisting of a salt and water, is
known as neutralization. The neutral solution contains equal
numbers of hydroxide and hydrogen ions.
Hydrolysis
Hydrolysis is the chemical decomposition of a substance by
water, with the water also being decomposed. Salts of weak
acids, weak bases, or both, are partially hydrolyzed to form
molecules of weak electrolytes in solution. An ester may be
hydrolyzed to form an alcohol and an acid.
PH OF SOLUTIONS
Neutral solutions have equal concentrations of
hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions. Pure water is
neutral because it ionizes very slightly to give one
hydroxide ion and one hydroxide ion for each
molecule ionized.
Whether a solution is acidic or alkaline, there are
always both H
and OH
ions present. It is the pre-
dominance of one type of ion over the other that
determines the degree of acidity and alkalinity.
When referring to the degree of acidity or alkalinity
of solutions it is usual to refer only to the hydrogen
ion concentration.
Pure water at 25 °C contains 0.000 000 1 g, or
10
7
g, of hydrogen ions per litre.
Because the molecular mass of a hydrogen ion is
1, the hydrogen ion concentration of pure water can
be expressed as follows:
[H
] (Pure water)110
7
mol/l
There is however no SIunit prefix for 10
7
and
therefore the prefix nano (n) which means 10
9
is
used. The SIunit formula is written:
[H
] (Pure water)100 10
9
mol/l
[H
] (Pure water)100nmol/l
Normal blood, being slightly alkaline (pH about
7.4), contains fewer hydrogen ions than pure water:
[H
] (Blood)40 nmol/l
E
XPRESSING HYDROGEN ION CONCENTRATION
As a convenient way of expressing hydrogen ion
concentration, the symbol pH was introduced by
Sorensen in 1909. pH is defined as the negative
value of the logarithm to the base 10 of the hydro-
gen ion concentration:
pHlog
10
[H
]
The pH of pure water can be expressed as follows:
pH (pure water)log
pH (pure water)7 (neutral)
The pH scale is usually expressed from 0 to 14 units,
with a pH of less than 7 indicating acidity and a pH
above 7 indicating alkalinity:
Acidity Neutral Alkalinity
pH 0 pH 7 pH 14
pH can be measured using pH papers which give an
approximate pH value, or by using a colorimeter
with indicators and a series of coloured standards, or
a pH meter which provides the most accurate
method of determining pH.
B
UFFER SOLUTION S
Buffer solutions contain a mixture of a weak acid
and a salt of a strong base, or a weak base and its
salt with a strong acid.
Due to their composition, buffers are able to resist
changes in pH. For example, if a small amount of
hydrochloric acid is added to a buffer solution the
hydrogen ion content does not increase very much
because it combines the weak base of the buffer
resulting in only a slight decrease in pH.
1
10
7
46 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.6
A buffer has its highest buffering ability when its pH
is equal to its pK.
Buffers are used in clinical chemistry when the pH
needs to be carefully controlled, e.g. when measur-
ing enzyme activity.
INDICATORS
Indicators are substances that give different colours
or shades of colour at different pH values. For
example, phenol red changes from yellow at pH 6.8
to a deep red at pH 8.4.
Indicators are used to determine the pH of liquids
and the ‘end-point’ of acid-base titrations. When
titrating a strong or a weak acid with a strong base,
an indicator is selected which changes colour at an
alkaline pH, e.g. phenolphthalein. When titrating a
strong or weak base with a strong acid, an indicator
is used which changes colour at an acid pH, e.g.
methyl orange.
PURCHASINGCHEMICALS, REAGENTS, STAINS
Whenever possible, chemicals, reagents and stains
for use in district laboratories should be purchased
at regional or central level to promote standardiz-
ation and benefit from bulk-purchasing prices. If this
is not possible the following guidelines are
recommended when ordering chemicals, reagents
and stains.
Ordering chemicals and reagents
Obtain a catalogue and price list from the
manufacturer or local supplier.
When ordering, use the correct name and when-
ever possible give the chemical formula. Some
chemicals can be obtained in both hydrated and
anhydrous form.
Check that the amount you are ordering is avail-
able. Unless a chemical is very expensive, it is
unlikely to be available in amounts under 100 g.
Many chemicals may only be available in
quantities of 250 g or 500 g.
Check that the shelf-life of the chemical is
acceptable and the conditions of storage can be
met to ensure stability and safety in transit and in
the laboratory.
If needing to import a chemical, make sure
national regulations will permit importation and
that the chemical is not listed by the manufac-
turer as unstable and therefore unsuitable for
export (this information will be in the manufac-
turer’s catalogue).
Check the price of the chemical and terms of
purchase. Some chemical companies and sup-
pliers have a minimum order value making it
unaffordable to buy a single or a few chemicals
at a time.
Ordering dyes and ready-made stains
When purchasing dyes and stains it is also important
to obtain a supplier’s catalogue:
to ensure the correct name of the dye or stain is
used when ordering.
to know the form available, e.g. powder, liquid
concentrate, or liquid ready-made stain, and to
know the quantities available.
to check stability and storage requirements.
Most of the aqueous-based stains used in micro-
biology and parasitology can be easily prepared
locally from powders. The alcohol-based stains used
in haematology, however, are less easily made local-
ly when water-free methanol or ethanol are difficult
to obtain. In these situations it may be more appro-
priate and cost-effective to purchase the ready-made
stains to ensure quality. Only small volumes of the
stains are used in the working solutions.
2.7 Communicating
effectively
By definition, communication is the accurate passing
on or sharing of information. In district laboratory
work there are three main ways of communicating
information:
by writing
by speaking
by actions.
WRITTEN COMMUNICATION
To be effective, written communication needs to be:
presented legibly and neatly,
expressed clearly and simply.
Writing legibly and neatly
In laboratory work, serious consequences may result
when hand-written figures or words are read
incorrectly because of poor handwriting or untidy
corrections. An illegibly written report may result in
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 47
2.6–2.7
a patient receiving incorrect treatment. The presen-
tation of well-written and neat reports not only
avoids errors, misunderstandings, and frustrations,
but also inspires confidence in those using the lab-
oratory. Before issue, all reports should be checked
by the most senior member of staff. To promote
standardization and neatness of reporting, the use of
rubber stamps is recommended as described in sub-
unit 2.2. Recording of patient data and the results of
tests in laboratory registers must be done with care
as also the recording of quality control data.
Writing clearly and simply
Opportunities for laboratory personnel to develop
written skills should be provided during training.
A trained laboratory officer needs to know how
to write clear reports and instructions with regard to
standard operating procedures, use of equipment,
preparation of reagents, safety measures, collection
of specimens, laboratory policies, notices (memos),
agendas for meetings, work reports, budgets, and
requisitioning of laboratory supplies.
Laboratory personnel should be encouraged to
contribute to newsletters and journals.
Computer skills:Where facilities exist, laboratory staff should
be trained in basic computer skills, including the use of e-mail
and how to process data and access information from relevant
websites via the internet.
SPOKEN COMMUNICATION
Important aspects of spoken (verbal) communication
include:
clarity of speech and language used.
tone of voice.
ability to speak informatively.
Importance of communicating effectively
Laboratory staff must be able to communicate
well if a laboratory service is to function
smoothly and reliably and inspire user confi-
dence.
In communicating it is important to consider:
nature of the information being communi-
cated.
person or persons to whom the information
is being communicated.
most effective way of communicating the
information.
whether the communicated information has
been understood and responded to appro-
priately.
Clarity of speech and language used
The main requirement of spoken communication is
that the words spoken can be heard distinctly by the
person to whom they are addressed in a language
and dialect that is clearly understood by the person.
A barrier to effective spoken communication is
background noise. Noise should therefore be kept
to a minimum when speaking, e.g. reduce the speed
of a centrifuge. Radios should not be played in lab-
oratories. Such noise not only interferes with com-
munication but can also be a distraction to persons
working in the laboratory leading to errors in work
due to loss of concentration.
It is particularly important to speak clearly and
politely when addressing patients. Hesitant and
mumbled instructions lead to misunderstandings
and a lack of confidence by patients.
If the telephone is used to communicate test re-
sults, e.g. those needed urgently, it is particularly
important to speak clearly to avoid errors. The per-
son receiving the information should be asked to
repeat back the name and identification number of
the patient, and the test result.
Tone of voice
A kind and understanding tone of voice may greatly
help a patient, especially a child, to feel less fright-
ened, whereas a loud and impatient tone of voice
may cause fear and add to the suffering of a patient.
A laboratory worker should always try to reassure
patients by explaining simply the procedure of a test
and, without disclosing professional information,
seek to answer patients’ queries. Try always to have
the time to listen.
It is particularly important to communicate well in
difficult situations, for example when called to cross-
match blood during a night emergency. Under these
circumstances it is essential for the laboratory worker
not only to function rapidly and reliably but also to
reply calmly and patiently to anxious relatives and
blood donors.
Spoken communication is influenced by temp-
erament and fatigue, but a greeting and courteous
response based on local traditions and a respect for
all persons should always be possible.
Ability to speak informatively
The ability to speak competently and informatively is
particularly important when giving the results of
tests by telephone or directly to a medical officer,
community health worker, or nurse. An understand-
ing of the clinical significance of investigations is
required.
If a laboratory worker does not have sufficient in-
formation to answer a question about a report, the
48 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
2.7
questioner should be referred to a more experi-
enced member of staff. If unable to reply and no
other person is available, the laboratory person must
advize that he or she is unable to assist. Inaccurate
information must never be communicated.
The ability to speak informatively is also required
when attending hospital interdepartmental meetings
to discuss laboratory policies. Always think through
what you are going to say before communicating it.
ACTION COMMUNICATION
Communication through a culturally acceptable
bodily manner and actions (body language) is par-
ticularly important when relating to patients.
A pleasant, friendly, professional manner and a
neat clean appearance inspire confidence whereas
an impatient, aggressive manner or an untidy
appearance can make patients nervous and afraid.
When unable to speak the language of a patient,
facial expressions and actions become extremely im-
portant in reassuring a patient. In such a situation an
interpreter must be used to communicate important
information to a patient, obtain confirmation of a
patient’s identity, and translate what the patient
wishes to say. A smile and a caring look and action
can inspire trust.
Appropriate action communication is also im-
portant among staff members if a pleasant working
environment is to be maintained.
REFERENCES
1 Nwobodo ED. Medical lab reports: Are we too confident
in their results? Africa Health, 2002, 3.
2 Bedu-Addo G, Bates I. Making the most of the labora-
tory. Principles of medicine in Africa, 2004, p. 1329.
Cambridge University Press.
3 Elsenga WK. Introduction of a quality assurance hand-
book, a guideline for accreditation of medical laboratories.
Paper presented at the 20th World congress of medical
technology, Dublin, 1992, July, pp. 26–31.
4 Houang L. Operating costs of the peripheral laboratory
and cost of tests. In health laboratories in developing coun-
tries. Proceedings of a Workshop, 1990. Health Co-
operation papers No. 10, Associazione Italiana ‘Amici di
R. Follereau’.
5 Mundy CJF et al. The operation, quality and costs of a
district hospital laboratory service in Malawi.
Transactions Royal Society Tropical Medicine and
Hygiene, 2003, 97, pp. 403–408.
6 WHO Essential Health Technologies (EHT)
Department. The role of laboratory external quality
assessment schemes, 2004. Accessed from the EHT
website www.who.int/eht/main_areas_of_work/DIL/
Lab_Tech(listed under Index as External Quality Ass….
11 Nov 2004).
RECOMMENDED READING
Bates I, Bekoe V, Asamoa-Adu A. Improving the accuracy of
malaria-related tests in Ghana. Malaria Journal, 2004, 3: 38.
Also available online www.malariajournal.com/content/3/1/38
Gadzikwa E. Benchmarking quality in the laboratory. Mera,
July 2004, pp. vii–viii.
Laboratory services for primary health care: requirements for
essential clinical laboratory tests. World Health Organization,
WHO/LAB/98.2, 1998. Available from WHOHealth
Laboratory Unit, WHO, 1211 Geneva, 27-Switzerland.
Basics of quality assurance for intermediate and peripheral lab-
oratories. World Health Organization, Alexandria, 2nd
edition, 2002. (WHO Regional Publication, Eastern
Mediterranean Series No. 2). Obtainable from WHO
Regional Office, Abdul Razzak Al Sanhouri Street, PO Box
7608, Nasr City, Cairo 11371, Egypt.
Website www.emro.who.int
Quality systems for medical laboratories: guidelines for im-
plementation and monitoring. World Health Organization,
Alexandria, 1995 (WHO Regional Publication, Eastern
Mediterranean Series, No. 14). Obtainable from WHO
Regional Office, Abdul Razzak Al Sanhouri Street, PO Box
7608, Nasr City, Cairo 11371, Egypt.
Website www.emro.who.int
Quality assurance of sputum microscopy in DOTs pro-
grammes, World Health Organization 2004. Available from
WHO, Geneva. Can also be downloaded from www.who.int
(use search facility).
TOTALQUALITY MANAGEMENT OF DISTRICT LAB ORATORY SERVICES 49
2.7
3
Health and safety in district laboratories
50 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.1
3.1 Implementing a
laboratory health and safety
programme
Accidents in the laboratory can result in:
injury, death, ill health, and disablement of staff,
patients, and others.
work being disrupted with possible discontinuity
of laboratory services.
loss of valuable laboratory equipment, supplies,
and records.
– loss of or contamination of specimens with
serious consequences for patients.
damage to the laboratory, adjacent departments
and buildings, and to the environment.
If such accidents are to be avoided, a relevant, work-
able, and affordable laboratory health and safety
programme is essential.
R
ISK ASSESSMENT
Before implementing a district laboratory safety pro-
gramme, it is essential for those in charge of district
laboratory services, the district laboratory coordi-
nator, and senior laboratory officers, i.e. district
safety committee, to make a careful local risk
assessment:
1 Identifying the hazards, i.e. what are the com-
monest causes of accidents.
2 Deciding what actions can be taken to remove
the hazards, e.g. a simple structural repair,
changes in the storage of chemicals, or changes
to safer working practices.
3 Evaluating for those hazards that cannot be
removed what are the associated risks, i.e. what
harm can be caused by each hazard.
4 Deciding what safety regulations and safety
awareness measures are needed to minimize the
risks and prevent accidents occurring.
The district safety committee should:
– prepare a written Code of Safe Laboratory
Practice based on the findings of the risk assess-
ment.
circulate the Safety Code to all district labora-
tories and train all laboratory personnel how to
apply the Safety Code in their workplace.
– appoint a trained s afety laboratory officer to
manage the laboratory safety programme.
COMMON HAZARDS IN DISTRICT LABORATORIES
The following are important hazards that require
assessment and management in district laboratories:
Unsafe premises Equipment hazards
Naked flames Explosions
Microbial hazards Infestation by ants,
Chemical hazards rodents, cockroaches
Glassware hazards Unreliable water supply
Sharps hazards
Accidents that can arise from these hazards are
summarized in Chart 3.1.
Objectives of a laboratory health and
safety programme
To identify hazards in the work place and
assess the risk to staff, patients, and others.
To prepare and implement an effective
Code of Safe Laboratory Practice.
To check whether health and safety
regulations are being followed.
To make sure staff know how to work
safely, what to do when an accident occurs
and how to carry out emergency First Aid.
To ensure all laboratory accidents are
reported informatively and investigated
promptly.
To promote safety awareness.
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 51
3.1
Chart 3.1 Common causes of accidents in district laboratories
HAZARD ASSOCIATED ACCIDENT
UNSAFE LABORATORY Burns and inhalation of smoke during a fire:
PREMISE when emergency exit routes from the laboratory are blocked by equipment,
storage boxes, etc.
when, in a subdivided laboratory, there is only a single exit and staff become
trapped in one section.
Staff are injured by falling on a slippery or damaged floor or from
broken glass on the floor:
when the floor is not cleaned properly after spillages or glassware breakages.
when wax or other slippery cleaning substance is applied to the floor.
when damaged areas of the floor are covered with matting.
Risk of infection to staff and others:
when there is no separate hand basin with a reliable water supply for
handwashing.
when no separate rest-room is provided for staff and food and drink are
consumed in the laboratory.
when laboratory staff do not leave their protective clothing in the laboratory
when leaving the workplace or when the clothing is not laundered frequently
enough.
when bench surfaces are not disinfected or cleaned properly each day.
when the working area is not separated from the areas where outpatients are
received and blood samples collected.
when the laboratory has no safe systems for decontaminating infective
materials, disposing of waste and washing reusable laboratoryware.
Injury from chemicals:
when chemicals with irritating fumes are used in a laboratory with inadequate
ventilation.
when hazardous chemicals are stored on high shelves or on the floor under
benches.
Injury from equipment:
when electrical equipment has faulty earthing or insufficient ventilation.
when unsafe adaptors or extension leads are used because there are
insufficient electric wall points.
when the laboratory has no preventive maintenance schedules and equipment
is not inspected regularly for defective insulation, corrosion, and loose
connections.
Note: The features of a safe laboratory environment are described in subunit 3.2.
NAKED FLAMES Injury from fire caused by lighted bunsen burners, spirit burners, tapers,
matches, alcohol swabs, ring burners, stoves:
when a lighted burner is placed in sunlight, making the flame difficult to see.
when a Bunsen burner, ring burner, match, or taper is lit too close to a
flammable chemical.
when sheets of paper or other combustible material are accidentally left over
the chimney (burner unit) of a gas or kerosene refrigerator.
52 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.1
when a lighted taper is carried across the laboratory close to where a
flammable stain or reagent is being used or stored.
Note: Fire safety is covered in subunit 3.7.
MICROBIAL HAZARDS Pathogens are accidentally ingested:
from contaminated fingers when personal hygiene is neglected.
when hands are not washed after handling specimens or cultures.
when specimens or liquid cultures are mouth-pipetted.
Pathogens are accidentally inoculated:
through needlestick injuries caused by resheathing needles after collecting
blood or careless handling of needles and lancets.
through open uncovered skin wounds.
through injury from broken contaminated glassware.
Pathogens are accidentally inhaled in airborne droplets (aerosols):
when snap-closing specimen containers.
when vigorously dispensing or pouring infectious fluids.
when sucking up and blowing out fluids from pipettes.
when specimens are hand-centrifuged in open containers or when a container
breaks in an electric centrifuge and the lid is opened before the aerosols have
settled.
when infectious material is spilled following the dropping or knocking over of
a specimen container or culture.
Note: Safety measures to prevent accidents associated with microbiological
hazards are described in subunits 3.3 and 3.4. Personal hygiene and other
personal safety precautions are covered in subunit 3.2.
CHEMICAL HAZARDS Toxic or harmful chemicals causing serious ill health, injury, or irritation:
when toxic or harmful chemicals are swallowed by being mouth-pipetted.
when fumes from irritant chemicals are inhaled in poorly ventilated areas of
the laboratory.
when no protective goggles or gloves are worn and harmful chemicals enter
the eye or come in contact with the skin.
Flammable chemicals causing fire:
when flammable chemicals are used or stored near a naked flame.
when a lighted ‘swab’ is used to heat stain in the Ziehl-Neelsen method and
ignites nearby flammable chemicals.
when the neck of a bottle containing a flammable chemical is accidentally
flamed.
when a flammable chemical is spilled near a flame.
Corrosive chemicals causing serious injury and burns:
when corrosive reagents are ingested by being mouth-pipetted.
when strong acids are accidentally knocked from shelves or spilled.
when intense heat is produced during the dilution or dissolving of a strong
acid or alkali or when water is added to a concentrated acid.
when a corrosive chemical comes into contact with the skin, or the eyes are
splashed when opening and pouring a corrosive chemical.
Note: Preventing chemical associated accidents is covered in subunit 3.5.
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 53
3.1
GLASSWAREHAZARDS Broken glass causing cuts, bleeding, infection:
when cleaning damaged slides or cover glasses.
when using pipettes with broken ends that have not been made smooth in a
flame.
when a long pipette is pushed into a pipette filler and ‘snaps’ because the
pipette is gripped near the tip not the top.
when picking up pieces of glass following a breakage.
when glass fragments are left on the floor after a breakage.
when a waste bin containing broken glass is overfilled.
when glass and other sharp articles are not separated from other refuse or the
‘sharps’ are discarded in containers that can be easily punctured.
Note: Safety measures to avoid injuries from broken glass are included in subunit
3.6.
EQUIPMENTHAZARDS Electric shock:
when equipment is not reliably earthed or electrical circuits are faulty.
when touching live wires in attempting to repair equipment or replace compo-
nents, e.g. lamp, without first disconnecting the equipment from the mains.
when handling electrical equipment with wet hands or standing on a wet
floor.
Fire:
when cables and electrical equipment overheat due to overloading of
conductors.
when there is overheating caused by the overuse of adaptors.
when insulation is inadequate or becomes damaged.
when thermostats fail and there is no temperature cut-out device to prevent
overheating.
when electrical sparking or arching causes flammable material to ignite.
when preventive maintenance is not carried out to check for corrosion, wear,
and loose connections.
when a battery lead becomes accidentally positioned across the opposite
battery terminal.
Injury from moving parts:
when an open hand-centrifuge is used in a part of the laboratory where it can
easily injure a person.
when a person opens a centrifuge lid and tries to stop the motor manually
(where the equipment does not have a safety device to prevent this).
when a centrifuge is not balanced, resulting in the buckets and trunnions
spinning off the rotor, particularly when there is corrosion.
Note: The safe use of equipment is covered in subunit 3.6.
EXPLOSION HAZARDS Injury from explosions:
when incompatible chemicals explode.
when leaking gas explodes.
when bottles of fluid explode inside an autoclave.
Note: The safe use and storage of chemicals and gas cylinders are covered in
subunit 3.5 and the correct use of an autoclave in 4.8.
General factors that contribute to the
occurrence of accidents
In addition to identifying the hazards listed in Chart
3.1, the district laboratory safety committee should
also address any other environmental or personal
factors that can increase the risk of accidents occur-
ring in district laboratories. These include:
Inexperience and insufficient training and super-
vision of staff and lack of health and safety
awareness by senior laboratory officers.
Untidy working, allowing the bench to become
cluttered and not using racks to avoid spillages.
Too heavy a workload for the size of laboratory
and number of staff.
Rushing to finish work ‘on time’.
Loss of concentration due to a noisy working
environment, constant interruptions, and excess-
ive heat particularly in small poorly ventilated
outreach laboratories.
Fatigue due to frequent emergency work during
night hours.
Many of these factors can be remedied by:
on-going health and safety training in the work-
place.
good laboratory practice and common sense.
changing the work attitudes of laboratory staff.
increasing health and safety awareness in the
laboratory by frequent discussions on safety
issues and displaying appropriate safety symbols
and notices.
– monitoring and improving the working con-
54 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.1
ditions of district laboratory personnel as part of
total quality management (see Chapter 2).
C
ODE OF SAFE LABORATORY PRACTICE
After carrying out a careful risk assessment, the dis-
trict laboratory safety committee should be able to
formulate a Code of Safe Laboratory Practice that is
relevant to the laboratories in its district.
Guidelines for a Code of Safe Laboratory
Practice
The following should be included in a Code of Safe
Laboratory Practice for district laboratories:
SAFE WORKING ENVIRONMENT
Rules concerning access to the laboratory and
displaying of safety signs and notices for staff,
patients, and visitors to the laboratory.
Procedures to follow to maintain local laboratory
security.
How to keep the laboratory clean.
How to separate and dispose of general waste,
broken glass and other ‘sharps’, contaminated
materials, and different specimens.
Decontamination procedures.
Washing of reusable specimen containers,
needles, syringes, lancets, slides, cover glasses,
pipettes.
Disinfectants and their use in the laboratory.
Sterilization procedures.
Ventilation of the laboratory.
I
NSECT AND RODENT Damaged equipment causing injury:
INFESTATION – when insects enter unmeshed ventilation openings, leading to damaged
components and electrical faults.
when rodents damage earthing and insulation around cables causing electric
shock and fires.
Damage to structure and furnishings of the laboratory
when ants and rodents damage wooden window frames, bench supports or
shelving.
when there is no inspection of the laboratory or an infestation is not treated.
UNRELIABLE WATE R Contributing to infection:
SUPPLY – when there is insufficient running water for handwashing and the laboratory
has no alternative water supply, e.g. rain water in storage tanks.
when intermittent water supplies interrupt cleaning of the laboratory,
decontamination of infectious material, and washing of laboratoryware.
How to check the laboratory for structural
damage and wear that may lead to accidents or
make the premise less secure.
Checking for and controlling infestation by ants,
cockroaches, rodents.
Maintenance schedules and routine cleaning of
equipment.
Inspecting electrical equipment for damage to
insulation and loose connections in plugs.
Rules for the storage and labelling of chemicals
and reagents and how to keep an inventory of
chemicals.
Regulations covering the safe packing and trans-
port of specimens.
Procedure for the reporting of faults.
SAFE WORKING PRACTICES
Personal hygiene measures and wearing of safe
footwear.
Regulations concerning the wearing, storing,
decontamination and laundering of protective
clothing.
Preventing laboratory acquired infection includ-
ing regulations to avoid the accidental:
– ingestion of pathogens,
– inhaling of pathogens,
– inoculation of pathogens.
What to do when there is a spillage of a speci-
men or liquid culture.
Safety rules concerning the handling and storage
of chemicals and reagents that are flammable,
oxidizing, toxic, harmful, irritant, and corrosive,
and how to manage chemical spillages.
What to do when there is a glass breakage.
How to pipette and dispense safely.
Safe operation of manual, electrical, and battery
operated laboratory equipment.
Working tidily, use of racks, and rules to prevent
the floor and benches from becoming cluttered
and exits obstructed.
Use of protective gloves, goggles, face shield,
dust mask, eyewash bottle.
How to control noise levels and other causes of
loss of concentration.
EMERGENCY FIRST AID
Contents of a First Aid box.
First Aid for:
cuts, needlestick injuries, poisoning,
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 55
3.1
bleeding, fainting,
heat burns, electric shock,
chemical burns, resuscitation.
FIRE MANAGEMENT
Fire prevention.
What to do if there is a laboratory fire.
Correct positioning, use, and maintenance of fire
fighting equipment and a fire blanket.
REPORTING AN ACCIDENT OR LABORATORY
RELATED ILLNESS
Who should be notified and procedure to be
followed.
Information required for the report and record.
Laboratory accident book
All accidents and laboratory associated illnesses must be re-
ported immediately and recorded in a Laboratory Accident
Book.The following information is required:
place, date and time of the accident,
person or persons involved,
injuries sustained,
emergency First Aid given and by whom,
details of follow-up actions,
staff comments on the possible reasons for the accident
and what should be done to prevent a repetition.
Important: All accidents should be investigated
promptly to ensure appropriate treatment is pro-
vided and preventive measures are put in place at
the earliest opportunity.
PROTECTIVE INOCULATIONS
List those inoculations recommended by the medi-
cal officer in charge of district laboratory services
(see subunit 3.2).
Note: The following subunits cover laboratory health
and safety issues:
3.2 Safe laboratory environment and personal
safety measures
3.3 Microbial hazards
3.4 Decont amination of infectious material and
disposal of laboratory waste
3.5 Chemical and reagent hazards
3.6 Equipment and glassware hazards
3.7 Fire safety
3.8 Emergency First Aid and contents of a First Aid
box
Further information: Detailed information on
laboratory biosafety, including a Safety Checklist for
biomedical laboratories can be found in the WHO,
3rd edition Laboratory Biosafety Manual (see
Recommended Reading).
Safety equipment for district laboratories
This should include protective clothing for staff, fire blanket,
dry chemical type fire extinguisher, eye goggles, face visor,
face masks, eyewash bottle, chemical resistant gloves and
other types of protective gloves, First Aid box, devices to
avoid mouth-pipetting, waste and sharps disposal containers,
leakproof specimen containers, and an autoclave (or other
sterilizer), and when possible a biological safety cabinet.
DUTIES OF A LABORATORY SAFETY OFFICER
Although it is not possible to achieve absolute safety
in the laboratory, a Safety Officer should be
appointed and work for the best possible level of
health and safety, promote safety awareness,
and make provision for continuing education in
biosafety.
A system for monitoring safety regulations in the
laboratory should be established. A check list should
be drawn up and regular (but random) inspections
made to:
Ensure staff are practising their Safety Code and
know what to do if there is a fire, equipment
fault, specimen or chemical spillage, or other ac-
cident in the laboratory.
Make sure test methods are safe, specimens and
reagents are being handled and disposed of
safely and specimen containers are being decon-
taminated and cleaned correctly.
Check that all hazardous chemicals and reagents
are marked with the correct hazard label and are
being stored and handled safely by staff.
Make sure that there is no mouth-pipetting and
check protective gloves are being worn by staff.
Observe whether protective clothing is being
worn and kept fastened and removed when
leaving the laboratory.
Note whether other safety regulations are being
kept such as no smoking, eating, drinking, chew-
ing gum or applying cosmetics in the laboratory.
Laboratory fridges should be inspected for food
and drink.
Check whether safety equipment such as the
First Aid box, eyewash bottles, eye goggles, sand
buckets, fire blanket, and fire extinguishers are in
good order and that staff know the locations and
how to use the equipment.
Make sure corridors and exits from the labora-
tory are not being obstructed and fire doors
(where fitted) are being kept closed.
Check whether the laboratory is being kept clean
and that benches are free of books, unnecessary
equipment, and personal property.
56 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.1–3.2
Examine equipment for defects and observe
whether equipment is being used correctly and
maintenance checks are being performed.
Check also for cracked or chipped glassware.
Observe whether safety regulations regarding
patients and visitors to the laboratory are being
followed and only authorised staff are entering
the working area.
Check for any structural defects in the laboratory
or infestation by insects or rodents.
During such inspections, the safety officer should
take the opportunity of reviewing and discussing
safety regulations with staff and revizing where
necessary FirstAid and fire regulations.If a laboratory
accidenthas occurred recently, thecauses of it should
bediscusse dand if required, news afetymeasures in-
troducedto help prevent itsrecurrence. There should
follow a written report with recommendations.
Laboratory security should also be discussed.
It is the duty of the district safety officer to in-
struct new members of staff (technical and auxillary)
in health and safety regulations. The Safety Officer
must ensure that faults reported by staff concerning
safety are investigated promptly. Careful records
must be kept of all laboratory accidents.
3.2 Safe laboratory premise
and personal safety measures
Unsafe working premises and staff not following
personal health and safety measures are major
causes of accidents in district laboratories.
SAFE LABORATORYWORKING ENVIRONMENT
The safety of the working environment must take
into consideration:
Type of work being performed, ie specimens
which the laboratory handles and pathogens
which may be encountered (mainly Risk Group
2 organisms, see subunit 3.3).
Working practices including the procedures and
equipment used.
Number of staff and workload.
– Laboratory’s location, climatic conditions, and
security of premise.
The following are important in making the work-
place safe:
Laboratory premise that is structurally sound and
in good repair with a reliable water supply and a
safe plumbing and waste disposal system.
Drainage from sinks must be closed and con-
nected to a septic tank or to a deep pit.
Note: If there is a shortage of piped water, pro-
vision must be made for the storage of water,
e.g. collection of rain water in storage tanks. It is
not safe for a laboratory to function without an
adequate water supply.
Adequate floor and bench space and storage
areas. The overall size of the laboratory must be
appropriate for the workload, staff numbers,
storage and equipment requirements.
Well constructed floor with a surface that is non-
slip, impermeable to liquids, and resistant to
those chemicals used in the laboratory. It should
be bevelled to the wall and the entire floor
should be accessible for washing. The floor must
not be waxed or covered with matting. Floor
drains are recommended.
Walls that are smooth, free from cracks, imper-
meable to liquids, and painted with washable
light coloured paint.
When practical, a door at each end of the lab-
oratory so that laboratory staff will not be
trapped should a fire break out. Doors should
open outwards and exit routes must never be
obstructed. Where fitted, internal doors should
be self closing and contain upper viewing panes.
External doors must be fitted with secure locks.
Adequate ventilation supplied by wall vents and
windows that can be opened. The windows
should not face the prevailing winds to avoid
excessive dust entering the laboratory in the dry
season and the wind interfering with work activi-
ties. Windows should be fitted with sun blinds
and insect proof screens, and when indicated
secure window bars.
Sectioning of the laboratory into separate rooms
or working areas. The area where blood samples
are collected from patients must be away from
the testing area of the laboratory. Seating should
be provided for patients outside the laboratory.
The specimen reception area must be
equipped with a table or hatchway which has a
surface that is impervious, washable, and resis-
tant to disinfectants. There should also be a First
Aid area in the laboratory containing a First Aid
box, eyewash bottle and fire blanket.
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 57
3.2
Note: A layout of a typical district hospital lab-
oratory and other useful information on how to
improve district laboratory biosafety can be
found in the Essential Medical Laboratory
Services Project Report: Malawi, 2002.
1
Bench surfaces that are without cracks, impervi-
ous, washable, and resistant to the disinfectants
and chemicals used in the laboratory.
Benches, shelving, and cupboards need to be
well constructed and kept free of insect and
rodent infestation. Benches should be kept as
clear as possible to provide maximum working
area and facilitate cleaning.
Suitable storage facilities, including a ventilated
locked store for the storage of chemicals and
expensive equipment.
Where required, a gas supply that is piped into
the laboratory with the gas cylinder stored in an
outside weatherproof, well-ventilated locked
store.
A staff room that is separate from the working
area where refreshments can be taken and per-
sonal food and other belongings stored safely.
Wall pegs should be provided in the labora-
tory on which to hang protective clothing.
Near to the staff room there should be a
separate room with toilet and hand-washing
facilities. There should be separate toilet facilities
for patients.
A handbasin with running water, preferably sited
near the door. Whenever possible, taps should
be operated by wrist levers or foot pedals. Bars
of soap should be provided, not soap dispensers.
Ideally paper towels should be used. If this is
not possible small cloth hand towels that are
laundered daily should be provided.
Provision of protective safety cabinets and fume
cupboards as required and when feasible.
Safe electricity supply with sufficient wall electric
points to avoid the use of adaptors and extension
leads (power supplies to district laboratories are
covered in subunit 4.2).
Fire extinguishers sited at accessible points.
These need to be of the dry chemical type.
Several buckets of sand and a fire blanket are
also required.
As good illumination as possible. Low energy
tube lights are recommended. Window screens
must be fitted to protect from direct sunlight and
glare but these should not make the working
areas too dark.
Provision of separate labelled containers for the
decontamination of infected material, discarding
of needles, syringes, lancets, glassware for clean-
ing, broken glass, and general laboratory waste.
A warning symbol such as a red triangle can be
used to mark containers in which infected
material is placed.
Use of safety signs and symbols
Displaying suitable safety signs and symbols is one
way of promoting safety awareness. Examples of
prohibition (do not) signs are shown in Fig. 3.1. They
can be easily prepared locally. Prohibition signs are
always crossed by a red line. No smoking signs
should be displayed in the laboratory and adjacent
patient waiting areas.
58 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.2
PERSONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY MEASURES
Personal health and safety measures include:
practice of personal hygiene.
wearing of protective clothing.
protective inoculations and medical
examinations.
Practice of personal hygiene
Laboratory staff must practice a high standard of
personal hygiene. This includes:
Washing hands and arms with soap and water
before attending outpatients, visiting wards, after
handling specimens and infected material, when
leaving the laboratory, and at the end of the
day’s work. When running water supplies are in-
terrupted, a tip type water container suspended
over the sink should be used for handwashing,
not a basin of water. Frequent handwashing is the
most effective action a laboratory worker can take
to avoid laboratory-acquired infection.
Covering any cuts, insect bites, open sores, or
wounds on the hands or other exposed parts of
the body with a water-proof adhesive dressing.
Irritating Insect bites should be treated.
Wearing closed shoes and not walking barefoot.
Not eating, drinking, chewing gum, smoking, or
applying cosmetics in any part of the laboratory
and not sitting on laboratory benches.
Note: Food or drink should never be stored in a
laboratory refrigerator.
The international biohazard sign as shown in Fig.
3.2 should be displayed on the laboratory door. It
indicates that the laboratory handles samples that
contain pathogenic microorganisms and therefore
access is restricted to authorised persons.
Recommended signs for labelling chemicals and
reagents, e.g. Flammable, Toxic, Corrosive, Harmful,
Irritant, Oxidizing, and Explosive can be found in
subunit 3.5.
Fig. 3.1 Prohibition signs for wall display
Fig. 3.2 International Biohazard Symbol
Not licking gummed labels or placing pens, pen-
cils or other articles near the mouth, eyes, or in
hair.
Avoid wearing jewellery in the working area,
particularly pendant necklaces and bracelets.
Important: Staff should know what to do should a
laboratory accident occur. An appropriately
equipped First Aid box should be accessible (see
subunit 3.8).
Protective clothing
Protective overall
An overall (coverall) should be worn over normal
clothing or instead of it to protect the major part of
the body from splashes, droplets of liquids contain-
ing microorganisms, and hazardous chemicals.
When indicated a waterproof apron should also be
worn.
The protective overall should be made of a
fabric such as polycotton that can be bleached and
frequently laundered and is suitable for wearing in
tropical climates. Ideally the fabric should also be
antistatic and flammable-resistant.
The overall must be worn with fasteners, buttons,
or tape closed. A side closing design with Velcrotype
tape is preferable to a front opening because it gives
better protection when working at the bench and
enables the overall to be removed quickly should
harmful or infectious material be spilt on it.
Soiled clothing should be placed in a special bag
and not left in a cupboard or under a bench in the
laboratory. Prior to laundering, the clothing and bag
should be soaked overnight in 1% v/v domestic
bleach. Protective clothing should always be left in
the laboratory working area and never taken home
or worn in a room where refreshments are taken.
When attending outpatients or inpatients, a clean
overall should be worn.
Gloves
Protective gloves should be worn when taking
samples from patients and when handling speci-
mens or cultures which may contain highly infec-
tious pathogens, e.g. Risk Group 3 organisms or
specimens from patients who may have hepatitis,
HIV infection or haemorrhagic fever. If indicated the
work should be undertaken in a biological safety
cabinet (see subunit 3.3).
Highly infectious material: This should be handled in a
laboratory with adequate containment facilities.
Re-usable gloves must be decontaminated and
washed while on the hands and after removal (see
subunit 3.4). Heat-resistant gloves should be worn
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 59
3.2–3.3
when handling hot objects, e.g. when unloading
an autoclave. Chemical resistant gloves should be
worn when handling hazardous chemicals. Rubber
gloves should be worn when cleaning and washing
laboratory-ware.
Safety goggles, face shields, dust masks, respirators
Shatter-proof safety goggles or face shields (visors)
should be worn when necessary to protect the
eyes and face from splashes, e.g. when handling
hazardous chemicals including disinfectants. Safety
goggles should fit over spectacles if worn and also
have sidepieces. Dust masks can protect against in-
haling particles of chemicals that are toxic or irritant.
Fabric masks provide only limited protection,
particularly against inhaling aerosols or chemical
particles. Personal respirators should be considered
to protect staff working with M tuberculosis.
2
Protective inoculations and medical
examinations
There should be a pre-employment health check
for all new members of staff. It is not possible or
desirable to vaccinate laboratory workers against
all the pathogens with which they may come in
contact. The medical officer in charge of the
laboratory should decide which vaccinations are
required. Protective inoculations are usually
given against tuberculosis (when not Mantoux posi-
tive), typhoid, diphtheria, tetanus, poliomyelitis, and
cholera.
Note: In HIV high prevalence areas, laboratory staff
who know that they are HIV positive should be
aware of the risk of working with sputum samples
that may contain M. tuberculosis.
3.3 Microbial hazards
Preventing laboratory associated infections depends
on laboratory staff understanding:
The routes by which infections are acquired in
the laboratory. These may be different from
‘natural’ infections.
Which organisms are the most hazardous so that
time and labour are not wasted on unnecessary
precautions.
Which techniques are the most hazardous so
that these may be replaced by those that are
safer.
How the laboratory worker can reduce direct
contact with infectious material and use safe
working practices.
LABORATORYACQUIRED INFECTIONS
Infections may be caused by microorganisms enter-
ing the body through the:
skin,
eyes,
mouth,
respiratory tract.
Infection through the skin and eyes
Organisms can penetrate the skin through cuts and
scratches. They can b e picked up on the hands
from benches and equipment which have b een
accidentally contaminated by small, usually
unnoticed, drops, spills, and splashes. They may be
transferred to the face or eyes by the fingers. Eye
infections can also occur by sample splashing to
the eye.
Infection through the mouth
Microorganisms may be ingested during mouth-
pipetting, either by direct aspiration or from the
mouth ends of pipettes which have been touched by
contaminated fingers. Direct finger to mouth infec-
tion is also possible, as is infection by eating food in
the laboratory. Food may become contaminated
from benches or fingers, or by contact with infected
material, for example in a refrigerator.
Organisms may also be transferred to the mouth
by cigarettes, cigars, or pipes which are handled or
placed on laboratory benches. For some pathogens
only a small number of organisms need to be in-
gested to cause infection, e.g. only a low infective
dose is required for Shigella infections.
Infection through the respiratory tract
Many common laboratory proce dures with micro-
organisms release aerosols, i.e. infecte d airborne
droplets, into the atmosphere. The larger of these
fall rapidly and contaminate hands, benches, and
equipment. Small droplets evaporate and leave
behind ‘droplet nuclei’ consisting of bacteria or
viruses which are too light to settle. They are
moved around a room and even a whole building
by small air currents and ventilation systems. If
inhaled, particles more than about 10 min
diameter, will be captured in the nasal passages.
Smaller particles, however, particularly those less
than 5 m in size, will not be trapped and may be
inhaled right into the lungs where they may start
an infection.
60 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.3
Infection of the general public
Microorganisms from laboratories may enter the
bodies of members of the general public by the
same routes as those affecting laboratory workers,
but the sources are different.
The general public may become infected as a
result of an ‘escape’ of microorganisms during the
transport of infectious specimens to or between lab-
oratories, for example from health centres to hospi-
tals. Another source of infection can occur if the
public comes into contact with infectious waste,
discarded or effluent materials from the laboratory,
due to a failure of the laboratory to decontaminate
such materials.
CLASSIFICATION OF I NFECTIVE M ICROORGANISMS
Experience has confirmed that some organisms are
more hazardous to handle and are more likely to in-
fect laboratory workers than others, e.g. hepatitis
viruses. More pathogens are also becoming resistant
to available antimicrobials, making the treatment of
infections caused by these resistant organisms more
difficult.
The World Health Organization classifies
infective microorganisms into four Risk Groups 1, 2,
3, and 4.
3
Agents in each Risk Group
The World Health Organization recommends that the health
authorities of each country should make lists of the organisms
and viruses in each Risk Group, relevant to their local cir-
cumstances so that appropriate precautions may be applied.
No one list will suffice for all countries because circum-
stances will vary from one region to another. For example, if
an organism is widespread in a community, there is no point
in taking elaborate laboratory precautions to protect labora-
tory staff. Again, there will be little need to protect the
community if an infection is unlikely to spread because of the
absence of vectors or as a result of good sanitation or other
public health measures.
Risk Group 1
The organisms in this group present a low risk to the
individual laboratory worker and to members of the
community. They are unlikely to cause human or
animal disease.
Examples include food spoilage bacteria,
common moulds, and yeasts.
Risk Group 2
These organisms offer a moderate risk to the lab-
oratory worker and a limited risk to members of the
community. They can cause serious human disease
but are not a serious hazard. Effective preventive
measures and treatment are available and the risk of
spread in the community is limited.
Examples include staphylococci, streptococci,
enterobacteria (except Salmonella typhi), clostridia,
vibrios, adenoviruses, polioviruses, coxsackieviruses,
hepatitis viruses, Blastomyces, Toxoplasma, and
Leishmania.
Risk Group 3
This group contains organisms that present a high
risk to the laboratory worker but a low risk to the
community should they escape from the laboratory.
They do not ordinarily spread rapidly from one indi-
vidual to another. Again, there are effective vaccines
and therapeutic materials for most pathogens in this
group.
Examples include Brucella,Mycobacterium tuber-
culosis, Salmonella typhi, Francisella,Pasteurella pestis,
many arboviruses, LCM virus, rickettsiae, chlamydia,
Coccidioides, Histoplasma, human immunodeficiency
viruses (HIV).
Risk Group 4
The agents in this group offer a high risk to the
laboratory worker and to the community. They
can cause serious disease and are readily trans-
mitted from one individual to another. Effective
treatment and preventive measures are not usually
available.
Examples include viruses of haemorrhagic fevers
including Marburg, Lassa and Ebola, equine and
other encephalitis viruses, SARS virus, and certain
arboviruses.
Classification of laboratories
Work with organisms in different Risk Groups requires dif-
ferent conditions for containment and different equipment
and procedures to conduct work safely. Assignment of an
agent to a biosafety level for laboratory work must be based
on a risk assessment.
There are four Biosafety Levels of laboratory:
Basic, Biosafety Level 1
Basic, Biosafety Level 2
Containment, Biosafety Level 3
Maximum Containment, Biosafety Level 4
Basic laboratory, Level 1: This is the simplest kind and is
adequate for work with organisms in Risk Group 1.
Basic laboratory, Level 2: This is suitable for work with or-
ganisms in Risk Group 2. It should be clean and provide
enough space for the workload and the staff, have adequate
sanitary facilities, especially for handwashing, and be
equipped with an autoclave. A biological safety cabinet is
desirable.
Containment laboratory, Level 3: This is more sophisticated
and is used for work with organisms in Risk Group 3 e.g.
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 61
3.3
culture work. The principle is to remove from the Basic lab-
oratory those organisms and activities which are particularly
hazardous because they are the most likely to infect by the air-
borne route, ingestion, or injection of very small numbers.
The object is to expose as few people as possible to the risk of
infection.
The Containment laboratory is therefore a separate room
with controlled access by authorized staff only. It should be
fitted with an appropriate biological safety cabinet. Its venti-
lation should be arranged so that air flows into it from other
rooms or corridors and out to the atmosphere (e.g. through
the filters of the safety cabinet) and never in the reverse
direction. This will prevent infectious aerosols which might be
released in the Containment laboratory from escaping into
other areas.
Maximum Containment laboratory, Level 4:This is intended
for work with viruses in Risk Group 4, for which the most
strict safety precautions are necessary.
These laboratories are usually separate buildings with
strictly controlled access through air locks and exit through
decontaminant showers. They have pressure gradients
between their various rooms and all air from rooms and safety
cabinets is filtered twice before discharge to the atmosphere.
All effluents from sinks, lavatories, etc. are decontaminated
before discharge into the public sewer. The staff of these
laboratories are specifically trained for the work they do.
WORKING SAFELY
Good technique and the practice of personal
hygiene as described in subunit 3.2 are the most
important ways of reducing contact with infectious
material and preventing laboratory related
infections.
Special precautions need to be taken when col-
lecting and testing specimens and handling infected
material. Careless handling of specimens, cultures
and other infected material can result in the:
contamination of fingers,
contamination of working surfaces and
equipment,
formation of aerosols (airborne droplets).
Important: Inhaling infected aerosols is a common
cause of infection.
How aerosols are formed
The following are the main ways aerosols can be
formed in the laboratory:
Pouring off supernatant fluids, particularly from a
considerable height into a discard container.
Vigorous tapping of a tube to resuspend a
sediment.
Opening cultures and the rapid snap-closing of
specimen or culture containers.
Heating a contaminated wire loop in an open
Bunsen burner flame.
Using a long springy loop which is not properly
closed.
Rapid rinsing of Pasteur pipettes or plastic bulb
pipettes, particularly when a discard container is
almost full.
Vigorous shaking of unstoppered tubes in a rack.
Centrifuging specimens or infected fluids in
open buckets, particularly when using a hand
operated centrifuge or an angled head cen-
trifuge and the tubes are more than three-
quarters full.
Opening a centrifuge immediately following the
breakage of a tube or container of infected fluid
before the aerosols have had time to settle.
Dropping or spilling a specimen or culture.
Mouth-pipetting and expelling an infected fluid,
particularly blowing out the last drop.
Important: It is essential that all laboratory staff know
how to work safely to prevent the formation, disper-
sion, and inhalation of aerosols.
Pouring infectious material safely
When needing to pour infectious fluids, for example
in disposing of supernatants that cannot easily
be pipetted, the fluids should be poured carefully
down the side of a funnel (metal or plastic) with the
narrow end of the funnel submerged in disinfectant
in a jar or beaker. This prevents splashes and
aerosol dispersion. The lip of the tube should
then be wiped with absorbent paper soaked in
disinfectant.
Opening cultures and ampoules safely
If there is a film of liquid between two surfaces that
are parted violently, an aerosol will be produced.
Such films containing microorganisms frequently
occur between the rims and bottoms of petri
dishes, and the stoppers and rims of bottles and
tubes. There is no simple solution to this problem
apart from care to prevent the films forming, and
where possible, opening the containers in a safety
cabinet.
Dried material in ampoules (stock cultures) may
also be dispersed if an ampoule is opened incor-
rectly. To open an ampoule safely, etch the glass
with a file above a cotton wool wad and then apply
a red hot wire to the etching so that the glass cracks
gently. After waiting a few minutes to allow air to
enter the tube and destroy the vacuum, the
ampoule should be held in a wad of cotton wool
and gently broken at the crack. Ampoules of Risk
62 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.3
Group 3 organisms should be opened in a safety
cabinet.
Inoculating loops and safe looping out
Long, springy, and improperly closed loops all shed
their loads easily, releasing aerosols which can be in-
haled and droplets which contaminate benches and
hands. When a hot loop touches a culture a sizzling
noise is heard. This indicates that aerosols are being
created.
Care, therefore, is needed in the making and use
of wire loops. The length of wire from the loop
holder to the loop should be short (6 cm), and the
loop itself should be small (2 mm in diameter) and
fully closed.
After flaming, loops should be allowed to cool
before use. Whenever possible a hooded Bunsen
burner should be used (see Plate 3.1). Aerosols can
also be dispersed during the inoculation of culture
media especially when the surface of an agar plate is
rough because it contains air bubbles.
Shaking and homogenizing safely
It is often necessary to shake vigorously cultures and
materials containing microorganisms. Unless the
caps are very tight, small droplets may escape and
contaminate the surroundings. It is therefore good
practice to place even tightly capped bottles in
plastic bags before shaking.
Less violent mixing is frequently done by sucking
a fluid up and down with a pipette (using a rubber
teat) but this usually releases aerosols. It is better to
use a Vortex mixer (see subunit 4.11). This does a
better job more safely.
Avoiding infection from centrifuge accidents
Most centrifuge accidents occur because the con-
tents on each side of a centrifuge are not balanced,
Plate 3.1 Hooded Bunsen burner. Information on suppliers
can be found in subunit 4.12
the buckets have been neglected and are corroded,
have not been placed correctly in the rotor, or the
centrifuge tubes are cracked or chipped (see also
subunit 4.7).
When tubes break in centrifuges, great clouds of
aerosols may be dispersed over wide areas. It is
usually obvious from the noise that a tube has
broken or a bucket has failed. The motor should be
switched off and the staff should leave the room for
30 minutes to allow most of the aerosols to settle or
to be removed by natural ventilation. An experi-
enced technician, wearing rubber gloves, should
then remove the buckets and debris for autoclaving
and swab out the bowl of the centrifuge with a
suitable disinfectant.
Even in the absence of accidents or misuse,
aerosols can be dispersed from uncapped cen-
trifuge tubes, especially when using a hand oper-
ated unprotected centrifuge. All tubes used for
centrifuging infectious material should be capped
and not filled more than three-quarters full. Sealed
centrifuge buckets should be used for Risk Group 3
material.
Avoiding infection from spillages and
breakages
Careless handling of pathological material and cul-
tures may result in the contamination of the outside
of vessels, the laboratory bench, or floor. Micro-
organisms can then be transferred from these
surfaces to the fingers and hands, enter the blood-
stream through cuts and scratches, or be transferred
to the mouth and eyes.
Specimens, culture tubes and bottles should
always be placed in racks so that they cannot fall
over and spill their contents. When culture tubes or
bottles are broken, infectious aerosols may be
released. The worker should be careful not to
breathe the air in close proximity to the breakage
(this is difficult, but there is no simple solution).
Spilled material and broken culture vessels
should be covered with a cloth soaked in disinfec-
tant, left for 30 minutes, and then cleared up using
a metal dust pan and stiff cardboard. These, and the
debris should then be autoclaved. Alternatively
disinfectant granules can be applied which are able
to disinfect the spillage in a shorter time (see subunit
3.4). Rubber gloves should be worn for the clearing
up operation.
Safe pipetting and dispensing
Mouth-pipetting has been the cause of many
infections, some of which have been fatal. Serious
injuries can also occur when mouth-pipetting
hazardous chemicals (see subunit 3.5).
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 63
3.3
Acquiring infection by mouth-pipetting
This can occur when:
pathogens in fluid specimens and cultures are
accidentally sucked up into the mouth,
aerosols are produced from the fluid as it is
being sucked up or expelled,
a pipette with an end that has been contami-
nated from fingers or a bench surface, is put in
the mouth,
a pipette with a chipped end causes cuts to the
fingers or lips allowing pathogens to enter.
A cotton wool plug in the top of a pipette is not an
effective microbial filter. Using a pipette with
attached rubber tubing and mouthpiece is also
hazardous.
Safe use of syringes and needles
Care in the use of syringes and needles is needed
for several reasons. The obvious hazard is pricking
oneself or one’s colleague with a needle. This may
be avoided only by very careful handling. Needle-
pricks are a common source of laboratory acquired
hepatitis, particularly when the laboratory worker
tries to resheath a needle after use or leaves the
needle in a collection tray with used cotton wool
swabs and other articles instead of placing it in a
separate puncture proof container.
The decontamination, cleaning, and sterilization
of reusable syringes, and lancets are described in
subunit 3.4. Disposable needles and syringes
should be incinerated. Prior to incineration they
Prohibition of mouth-pipetting
Due to the high risk of infection and injury to
laboratory staff, the World Health Organization
recommends that mouth-pipetting be banned
from all medical laboratories.
There are many inexpensive ways to pipette
and dispense safely without mouth-pipetting.
These are described in subunit 4.6.
should be discarded into jars or metal cans, not into
cardboard boxes because the sharp ends may pen-
etrate the card and prick any person who handles
the box. The jars or cans should not be allowe d
to overfill.
Other hazards arise from aerosols, created if a
needle flies off the end of a syringe when pressure
is applied to the plunger and the needle is blocked,
or when a needle is withdrawn through the rubber
cap of a vaccine-type bottle containing micro-
organisms. The second situation can be avoided by
withdrawing the needle through a swab of cotton
wool held over the vaccine bottle cap. This prevents
needle vibration and takes care of leakage.
BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS
Safety cabinets are intended to protect a laboratory
worker from aerosols and airborne particles. They
will not protect the person from spillages and the
consequences of mishandling and poor technique.
There are three kinds of safety cabinet, Classes I, II,
and III.
Class I and Class II cabinets are used in diagnos-
tic and containment laboratories for work with Risk
Group 3 organisms. Class III cabinets are used
almost exclusively for Risk Group 4 organisms.
Note: In district laboratories the resources for
purchasing a safety cabinet and the facilities for
installing, using, and maintaining such a cabinet may
not be available. It is therefore particularly important
for laboratory staff to follow safe working practices.
Class I safety cabinet
A Class I cabinet is shown in Fig. 3.3. It has a front
opening. The operator sits at the cabinet, looks
through the glass screen, and works with the hands
inside. Any aerosols released from cultures or other
infectious material are retained because a current of
air passes in at the front of the cabinet and sweeps
the aerosols up through a HEPA filter which
removes all or most of the organisms.
Clean air then passes through the fan, which
maintains the air flow, and is exhausted (discharged)
to atmosphere where any particles or organisms that
have not been retained on the filter are so diluted
that they are no longer likely to cause infection if
inhaled.
Class II safety cabinet
A Class II cabinet is shown in Fig. 3.4.
In a Class II cabinet about 70% of the air is
64 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.3
recirculated through filters so that the working area
is bathed in clean (almost sterile) air. The air flow
carries along any aerosols produced in the course of
the work and these are removed by the filters. Some
of the air (about 30%) is exhausted to atmosphere
and is replaced by a ‘curtain’ of room air which
Fig. 3.3 Example of a Class I saftey cabinet
Reproduced from Laboratory Acquired Infections with
permission of Butterworth and Co Publishers Ltd.
Fig. 3.4 Example of a Class II saftey cabinet
Reproduced from Laboratory Acquired Infections with
permission of Butterworth and Co Publishers Ltd.
enters at the working face. This prevents the
escape of any particles or aerosols released in the
cabinet.
Class III safety cabinet for Risk Group 4 viruses
This type of cabinet is totally enclosed and is tested under
pressure to ensure that no particles can leak from it into the
room. The operator works with gloves which form part of the
cabinet. Air enters through a filter and is exhausted to atmos-
phere through one or two more filters.
Use of safety cabinets
A safety cabinet should not be loaded with unnec-
essary equipment or it will not carry out its job
properly. Work should be done in the middle to rear
of the cabinet, not near the front. The operator
should avoid bringing the hands and arms out of the
cabinet while working.
After each set of manipulations and before with-
drawing the hands, the operator should wait for 2–3
minutes to allow any aerosols to be swept into the
filters. After finishing work in a safety cabinet, the
hands and arms may be contaminated and should
be washed immediately.
Siting and maintenance of a safety cabinet
The efficient working of a safety cabinet depends on
its correct sitingand proper maintenance. The manu-
facturer’sinstruction manualmust be studiedc arefully.
Safety cabinets should be swabbed out with a
suitable disinfectant after use and regularly decon-
taminated with formaldehyde. Decontamination is
essential before the filters are changed.
Note: Further information about biological safety
cabinets, including specifications, their siting and use
can be found in the WHO Laboratory Biosafety
Manual.
3
SAFE TRANSPORT OF SPECIMENS
Safety measures are needed to ensure specimens
are transported safely and with care:
from a ward or outpatient (OPD) clinic to the
laboratory.
between laboratories, e.g. from an outreach lab-
oratory to the district hospital laboratory or
regional public health laboratory, or from a qual-
ity control reference laboratory to laboratories
participating in an EQA programme.
Important: All specimens must be collected in leak-
proof appropriate containers.
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 65
3.3
Transporting specimens from wards or OPD
clinics
When hand-carrying, place the specimens upright in
racks in a closed container. The racks and carrying
container should be made of plastic so that they can
be easily disinfected and washed between use. The
request forms should be placed in a plastic bag that
can be sealed (grip type). During the hot season, an
insulated container should be used to transport the
specimens.
Transporting specimens between laboratories
Make sure the specimen container is tightly closed
and the cap is not leaking. Wrap each specimen in
sufficient absorbent material to absorb it should the
container break. Place it individually or with others in
a carton or strong plastic bag. Make sure there is
sufficient packing material around the specimens to
prevent them moving in the container or bag. If
sending glass slide preparations, use a plastic
reusable slide mailer.
Pack the container or bag of specimens with the
sealed plastic bag containing the request forms in a
suitable insulated container which will withstand
shock and weight pressure. Use sufficient packing
material in the insulated container. Insert a freezer
pack(s) or ice cubes (in sealed plastic bags) around
the container of specimens. Label the outer con-
tainer ‘Biological specimens – Infectious substance’,
preferably using the biohazard symbol shown in Fig.
3.5. The words KEEP COOL should also be promi-
nently displayed on the container. Fix a clearly
written delivery address label to the outer container.
A smaller label should show the address of the send-
ing laboratory. Cover the labels with clear adhesive
tape.
Fig. 3.5 Infections substance label.
Important: Use hospital transport or other reliable
carrier to transport specimens.
Postal transport regulations
If using the postal system, laboratories must follow
their national postal regulations which apply to the
mailing of biological infectious substances. These will
be available from the postal service. The postal
system is appropriate for sending formol saline
preserved biopsies or fixed smears to a
histopathological laboratory.
International transport regulations
Strict regulations exist for the transport of infectious
materials, including the proper use of packaging materials.
3
Major changes to the transport regulations were introduced in
2003.
4
Guidance can be obtained from WHO
5
and from the
International Air Transport Association (IATA).
6
3.4 Decontamination of
infectious material and
disposal of laboratory waste
It is essential for all district laboratories to operate
and sustain safe and effective systems for:
Decontamination and disposal of specimens,
cultures and other material which may contain
infectious pathogens. All specimens should be
regarded as potentially infectious.
Decontamination of glassware, plasticware, rub-
ber gloves, protective clothing, and equipment
used in laboratory testing.
Cleaning of reusable items such as specimen
containers, other glassware and plasticware,
syringes, lancets, rubber gloves, etc.
Sterilization of cleaned reusable items where
sterility is required before reuse.
Limitations in the use of disposables
Many district laboratory services in developing countries are
unable or cannot afford to obtain regular supplies of dispos-
able syringes, lancets, specimen containers, petri dishes, tubes,
pipettes, rubber gloves, etc. This subunit provides guidelines
on the decontamination, cleaning, and sterilization of
reusable items using methods that are feasible in district
laboratories.
66 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.3–3.4
METHODS OF DECONTAMINATION AND DIS POSAL OF
LABORATORYWASTE
In microbiological laboratory work, decontamination
means the making safe of infectious material or
articles that have been in contact with infectious
microorganisms prior to their disposal or cleaning
and reuse.
Safe processing of infectious laboratory waste
and contaminated articles requires the separation of
such waste and articles into clearly labelled (prefer-
ably colour-coded) discard containers according to
method of decontamination, disposal, and associ-
ated hazard.
Before being washed and reused, discarded, or
leaving the laboratory, all infectious material and
contaminated articles should be made non-
infectious.
Methods used to decontaminate infectious material
in district laboratories include:
autoclaving (sterilization)
boiling (effective method of disinfection)
use of chemical disinfectants
Sterilization
This is the most reliable way of achieving decontamination
because it completely destroys microorganisms, including
bacterial spores.
Responsibility of the laboratory for safe
decontamination, recycling, and disposal
Laboratory staff have a responsibility to protect
themselves, patients, the community, and en-
vironment from injury or damage originating
from infectious or toxic laboratory waste and to
minimize the hazards involved in decontami-
nation, recycling, and disposal.
Risks can be minimized by laboratory staff:
practising personal hygiene,
following safe working practices,
knowing and following correct methods for:
separating infe ctious materials and
laboratory waste,
de contaminating and disposing of
non-reusable infectious waste,
making non-infe ctious, cleaning, and
sterilizing reusable articles.
Important: It is the responsibility of district
health authorities to provide the equipment
and supplies needed by district laboratories to
operate a safe programme of decontamination,
disposal, and recycling.
Disinfection
This aims to destroy or at least reduce the number of contam-
inating microorganisms to levels that are no longer regarded
as harmful to health. It implies the destruction of vegetative
(non-sporing) infectious microorganisms but not necessarily
bacterial spores.
Methods used to dispose of laboratory waste in
district laboratories include:
incineration
burial in a deep covered waste pit or landfill
Note: Chart 3.2 provides guidelines on how to de-
contaminate and dispose of laboratory waste and
make non-infectious those articles that need to be
cleaned and reused.
Autoclaving
A district hospital laboratory must have access to
a reliable autoclave for decontaminating cultures
and other infectious waste. Health centre labora-
tories should be supplied with a pressure cooker
type autoclave and the fuel to run it.
When performed correctly, autoclaving is the
most effective method of decontamination because
it is capable of sterilizing infectious waste, i.e. de-
stroying all bacteria, bacterial spores, viruses, fungi,
and protozoa. During autoclaving, pressure is used
to produce high temperature steam. A temperature
of 121°C and holding time of 15 minutes, timed
from when 121°C is achieved in the load, is used to
sterilize infectious waste.
Agents requiring higher temperatures and holding times
Some transmissible agents, e.g. prions that cause Creutzfeldt
Jacob disease (CJD), require autoclaving at 134°C for 18
minutes to be inactivated.
Important: Laboratory staff must know how to use an
autoclave correctly and be aware of the dangers of
its misuse. The operating principle of autoclaves,
their correct use and control are described in sub-
unit 4.8.
Boiling
Heating in boiling water at 100°C for 20 minutes at
altitudes below 600 metres (2000 feet) is sufficient
to kill all non-sporing bacteria, some bacterial spores,
fungi, protozoa, and viruses including hepatitis virus-
es and HIV. Adding 20 g sodium carbonate to every
litre of water increases the effectiveness of the
disinfection.
Boiling at higher altitudes
Water boils at 100°C at sea level. The temperature of
boiling water is reduced by approximately 1°C for every
500 metres above sea level. A boiling time of 30 minutes
is therefore recommended when the altitude is greater than
600 metres.
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 67
3.4
If an electric ‘sterilizer’ is not available or there is
no mains electricity, a large pan or other metal con-
tainer can be used and the water heated using a
charcoal stove, kerosene or gas ring burner (located
in a safe place outside the laboratory working area).
Choose the coolest time of the day to boil and use
an autoclave.
When autoclaving is not possible, reusable
syringes, lancets, specimen containers and other
contaminated glassware and plasticware can be de-
contaminated by boiling in water for 10–20 minutes
before being cleaned for reuse. When boiling, all the
items must be completely submerged in the water.
After cleaning and before reuse, syringes and
lancets can be disinfected by boiling at 100°C for 20
minutes if sterilization by autoclaving is not possible.
The articles must be allowed to dry before being
used to collect blood samples otherwise the water
will haemolyze the red cells making the specimen
unfit for testing.
Use of disinfectants
Chemical disinfectants are expensive, hazardous to
health, and when compared with autoclaving and
boiling, chemical disinfection is the least reliable and
controllable method for the treatment of laboratory
infectious waste. It must also be remembered that
no single disinfectant is likely to kill all micro-
organisms in any sample of infected waste. For
example, chlorine releasing disinfectants are highly
active against viruses but poorly active against
mycobacteria, whereas phenolic agents are effective
against mycobacteria but poorly active against
viruses.
The laboratory use of chemical disinfectants
should be restricted to discard containers on the
bench, disinfecting equipment, bench surfaces, and
floors, and the treatment of spillages.
Correct dilutions must be used and the dilutions
must not be kept beyond their useful life which,
according to the disinfectant, will vary from a few
hours to a week or more. When used in discard con-
tainers, disinfectant solutions must be renewed daily.
All disinfectants are to some extent inactivated by
protein (particularly hypochlorite solutions), plastics,
rubber, hard water, and detergents. Disinfectant sol-
utions must not be overloaded because there is a
limit to the amount of material which they can
disinfect effectively. The article to be disinfected
must be in contact with the disinfectant and not
protected by air bubbles, immersion oil, or films of
grease.
When emptying discard containers of disposable
items, use a plastic strainer to collect the waste. If
containing glass, e.g. haematocrit tubes or other
sharp items, transfer the waste to puncture-resistant
containers for disposal.
Caution: Care must be taken when using disinfect-
ants, particularly when preparing dilutions.
Disinfectants are toxic and mostly corrosive and
irritant. Safety goggles, plastic apron, and chemical
resistant rubber gloves must be worn. When not in
use, discard containers should be covered using lids
that can be removed easily. The containers should
not be placed in direct sunlight.
The following are the most commonly used
chemical disinfectants in district laboratories:
phenolics
chlorine-releasing products
peroxygen compounds
alcohols
Note: None of these substances will kill or even
disable microorganisms unless they are properly
used and renewed regularly.
Weak disinfectants unsuitable for laboratory use
These include Dettol, chlorhexidine products such as
Hibitane, Hibisol, cetrimide compounds such as Cetevalon,
and hypochlorite solutions sold for treating baby feeding
bottles.
Phenolics
Examples of phenolics include Hycolin, Sudol,
Clearsol, Printol, and Stericol.These are active against
all non-sporing bacteria including mycobacteria.
They do not kill spores and are poorly active against
viruses. Phenolics are not markedly inactivated by
proteins. At an alkaline pH, their activity is reduced.
Phenolic disinfectants should be used at 2–5%
v/v concentration according to the manufacturers’
instructions for the ‘dirtiest conditions’. Dilutions
should not be kept for more than 24 hours. They
are useful for decontaminating material which may
contain mycobacteria. Phenolics are non-corrosive.
They are often used for wiping bench surfaces and
floors and when chlorine products cannot be used
because of their corrosiveness.
Chlorine-releasing disinfectants
These compounds contain chlorine and work by giv-
ing off free chlorine which is highly active against
Gram positive and Gram negative bacteria and
viruses including HIV and hepatitis B virus. Chlorine-
releasing products are used in discard containers
and for treating spillages of blood. Against
mycobacteria, chlorine products are less effective
than phenolics.
In an acid environment, chlorine release is
accelerated. Chlorine products are not thereforere c-
68 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.4
ommended for use in discard containers into which
urine supernatants are poured (phenolics are more
appropriate).Chlorine-releasing disinfectants include:
Sodium hypochlorite solutions sold as bleach sol-
utions for domestic and laundering purposes,
e.g. Chloros, Domestos, Jik, Presept, eau de Javel
and other trade names. These solutions generally
contain 5% available chlorine (but always read
the label on the container as some ‘thin’ bleach
solutions contain less than 5%).
Sodium hypochlorite solutions are also sold
for commercial use (in dairying and other trades
for disinfecting equipment). They usually contain
10% available chlorine and a surfactant.
Instability of hypochlorite solutions
Liquid bleach has the disadvantage that in heat and strong
light it rapidly deteriorates and looses its chlorine content.
This can be a serious problem in tropical countries. To
overcome this, the use of a more stable chlorine-releasing
compound such as sodium dichloroisocyanurate
(NaDCC) is recommended (see following text).
Calcium hypochlorite granules or tablets which
contain about 70% available chlorine.
Sodium dichloroisocyanurate (NaDCC) available
as:
a powder cont aining approximately 60%
available chlorine,
granules, e.g. HA Z-TABgranules containing
57.2–57.8% chlorine (99% by weight
NaDCC),
t ablets containing 1.5 g chlorine per tablet
(approx. 2.5 g NaDCC), usually in combi-
nation with an effervescent agent,
t ablets containing 2.5 g chlorine per tablet
(approx. 4.6 g NaDCC), e.g. HAZ-TAB
tablets without an effervescent agent.
Stability and other advantages of using NaDCC
Compared with hypochlorite solutions, NaDCC products
are more stable (3–5 y shelf-life) even at high tempera-
tures as along as they are stored in a dry environment.
Solutions of NaDCC are less inactivated by protein than
hypochlorite solutions and also have greater microbicidal
capacity than equivalent bleach solutions.
When treating spillages, the contact time of NaDCC
granules with the spillage can be reduced to 2–3 minutes
compared to the 30–60 minutes required when using
bleach solutions.
NaDCC non-effervescent tablets are easier and safer
to use in the laboratory, lighter in weight and therefore
easier and cheaper to transport.
Note: Some effervescent NaDCC tablets are expensive.
Non-effervescent products such as HAZ-TABtablets and
granules made by Guest Medical Trading Ltd (see
Appendix II) are recommended. NaDCC is readily
soluble in water, no effervescent agent is required.
Use of chlorine-releasing disinfectants in the labora-
tory: The disinfectant power of all chlorine-releasing
compounds is expressed as parts per million (ppm)
or percentage of available chlorine (av Cl) according
to concentration level as follows:
1 000 ppm 0.1% (1 g/l)
2 500 ppm 0.25% (2.5 g/l)
5 000 ppm 0.5% (5 g/l)
10 000 ppm 1% (10 g/l)
Note:If expressed in chlorametric degrees (°chloram),
1°chloram is equivalent to approximately 0.3% av Cl.
Chlorine solutions must be prepared daily and pro-
tected from sunlight and excessive heat. They are
strong oxidizing agents, corrosive to metal and may
damage rubber. The amount of available chlorine
required in solutions depends on the amount of
organic matter present. The following solutions are
recommended for use in the laboratory:
1000 ppm (0.1%) av Cl: For routine disinfection of
working surfaces and decontamination of soiled
hands and gloves.
2500 ppm (0.25%) av. Cl: For discard containers
(use non-metal containers).
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 69
3.4
5000 ppm (0.5%) av Cl: For use in emergency situ-
ations involving all haemorrhagic fever viruses.
10000 ppm (1%) av Cl: For treating spillages of
infectious material.
Note: Preparation of the commonly used 5% liquid
hypochlorites (bleach) and of NaDCC products is
given in Table 3.1.
Peroxygen compounds
An example is Virkon which when used at 1% w\v
concentrationhas a wide range of bactericidal, viruci-
dal and fungicidal activity. It has variable activity
against bacterial spores. A 3% w\v concentration is
recommended for Mycobacterium species. Neat
powder is used for spillages. Virkon has a built-in
colourindic atorand combines cleaning withdisinfe c-
tion.When dilutedit is non-irritantand haslow dermal
toxicity.It canb eused to cleancentrifuges providingit
iswashed off. Dilutions arestable for 7 days.It is how-
everexpensive when comparedto hypochlorite disin-
fectants. Virkonis available in bothpowder and tablet
formfrom Antec International (see Appendix11).
Perasafe: Antec International also manufactures Perasafe
which is a useful disinfectant for sterilizing instruments. It has
Table 3.1 Preparation of chlorine-releasing disinfectants commonly used in district laboratories
PRODUCT AVAILABLE CHLORINE REQUIRED
1 000 ppm 2 500 ppm 10 000 ppm
Use: Benches, hands, gloves Discard jars Spillages
Sodium hypochlorite
5% solution (bleach) 20 ml in 50 ml in 200 ml in
1 litre water 1 litre water 1 litre water
10% solution 10 ml in 25 ml in 100 ml in
1 litre water 1 litre water 1 litre water
NaDCC tablets
1.5 g tablet 1 tablet 1 –2 tablets 2 tablets
in 1 litre in 1 litre in 250 ml
water water water
2.5 g tablet (HAZ-TAB) 1 tablet 1 tablet 1 tablet
in 2.5 litre in 1 litre in 250 ml
water water water
Note: In small laboratories it may be more convenient to dilute a 2500 ppm solution to obt ain a 1000 ppm
solution to disinfect working surfaces: i.e. use 40 ml of 2500 ppm and 60 ml of water to give 100 ml of a
1 000 ppm solution.
Use of HAZ-TAB NaDCC granules for spillages
While 10000 ppm NaDCC solution can be obtained from tablets, the use of HAZ-TAB granules is recommended because these
can be applied direct to the spillage, do not spread the spillage, and have a more rapid action (2–3 minutes).
1
2
a rapid action (10 minutes immersion) and does not have the
irritant and other health problems associated with the use of
glutaraldehyde.
Alcohols
Ethanol and propanol at 70–80% v/v concentration
in water are useful for disinfecting skin and surfaces.
Penetration of organic matter is poor. Alcohols are
highly active against mycobacteria, non-sporing
Gram positive and Gram negative bacteria, and
fungi. HIV and hepatitis B and C viruses are inacti-
vated. Activity against non-lipid (naked) viruses and
bacterial spores is poor. When mixed with hypochlo-
rite their activity is increased.
Aldehydes
These less used disinfectants include:
Formaldehyde
Glutaraldehyde (glutaral)
Formaldehyde gas is an effective disinfectant against all
microorganisms including viruses, except at temperatures
below 20°C. A 5% v/v formalin solution (diluted from con-
centrated formalin solution) is occasionally used as a disinfec-
tant but formalin is too irritant for general use as a laboratory
disinfectant. When heated, formaldehyde gas is used to de-
contaminate safety cabinets. It is non-corrosive. Formalin sol-
ution is toxic with an irritating vapour, and may cause
sensitivity reactions. It is also a suspected carcinogen. Use
only in a well ventilated laboratory.
Glutaraldehyde preparations include Cidex, Clinicide,
Glutarex 3M, Asep, Totacideand Triocide, usually supplied at
working concentrations of 2%. It is an expensive disinfectant.
An alkaline activator must be added which is usually supplied
with the product.
In the laboratory, glutaraldehyde is used mainly to disin-
fect metal surfaces, e.g. instruments and centrifuge parts
where corrosive chlorine products cannot be used and viral
contamination is possible. It rapidly inactivates bacteria and
viruses including HIV and hepatitis B virus. It is also active
against mycobacteria, but its penetration of organic matter is
poor. Most glutaraldehyde products remain active for 7–14
days after activation. Cloudy solutions however should be dis-
carded. Glutaraldehyde is toxic, irritant, and mutagenic.
Contact with skin, eyes, and respiratory tract should be
avoided.
Incineration
In district laboratories, incineration, i.e. destruction
by burning, is a practical and effective method of
disposing of laboratory waste including contami-
nated disposables and specimens in non-reusable
containers, e.g. faeces. Purpose-built incinerators are
rarely available at district level. Open burning is
more common. The materials to be incinerated must
be carried to the incineration site in closed leak-
proof puncture resistant containers.
Local construction of a simple incinerator
7
Use an empty 300 litre (40 gallon) petrol drum
and obtain a metal lid and piece of fine wire
70 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.4
mesh (to replace the lid when burning is in
progress).
Fix a strong metal grating about a third of the
way up the drum, inserting steel rods to keep it
in place.
– Cut a wide opening below the level of the
grating as shown in Fig. 3.6.
Use the incinerator as follows:
1 Place the material for incineration on the grating
of the incinerator on top of a waste sheet of
paper or cardboard (to prevent items falling
through the grating). Do not overfill. Replace the
lid.
2 Fill the bottom of the drum with sticks, wood
shavings, and other combustible material.
3 Remove the lid and replace with the fine wire
mesh to retain burning fragments and smuts.
4 Light the fire and keep it burning until all the
waste has been burnt.
5 When cool, bury the ash in a deep covered pit.
Do not empty it on open waste ground.
Important: Site the incinerator in a safe place.
Surround it with a wire fence to prevent entry of
unauthorized persons or animals. Supervize the
incineration and bury the ash as soon as it has
cooled sufficiently (wear a dust mask and protective
gloves).
Brick built incinerator: A simple to construct brick incinera-
tor is described in Practical Laboratory Manual for health
centres in eastern Africa.
8
Steel rods to
support grid
Vent
Fig. 3.6 Simple field incinerator
Courtesy of the World Health Organization
Burial in a deep pit or landfill
Burying lab oratory waste prevents it becoming a
hazard providing the pit is located in a safe fenced
off area, is sufficiently deep (4–5 metres) and wide
(1–2 metres), has a strengthened rim, and is kept
covered. The disposal pit should not be used for
items that do not decompose, e.g. plastic lab-
oratoryware. These are best incinerated. Ideally all
infectious laboratory waste should b e decont ami-
nated or incinerated before it is discarded in a pit
or landfill. Once a week the waste should be
covered by a layer of quicklime, or if unavailable by
soil or leaves.
If a local landfill site is available, local health
authority guidelines should be followed regarding
its use. (Laboratory waste must never be dis-
posed of with household waste.) Waste must
always be transported in closed, strong, leakproof
containers.
Note: Chart 3.2 summarizes the methods used to
decontaminate and dispose of non-reusable
infectious material and how to decontaminate and
clean reusable articles in district laboratories.
CLEANING AND STERILIZATION OF R EUSABLE ITEMS
Decontamination is essential prior to the cleaning
and reuse of laboratory-ware. In district laboratories,
almost all glassware, many plastic items, and speci-
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 71
3.4
men containers will need to be reused. Disposable
containers should be used for faecal specimens.
Separate discard containers (preferably plastic),
filled with appropriate disinfectant are required for
syringes, lancets, slides, cover glasses, pipettes, tubes
and specimen containers. Each container should be
clearly labelled.
Prior to soaking slides in disinfectant, any oil
should be removed using a piece of rag or
absorbent paper dampened with disinfectant. Use
forceps to wipe the slide and dispose of the rag
or tissue.
Most locally available detergents are suitable for
cleaning laboratory-ware. After cleaning, each article
must be well rinsed in clean water to remove all
traces of detergent.
Caution: Great care must be taken to avoid injury
when handling lancets, scalpel blades, and cover-
glasses. When cleaning cover glasses (No 2 thick-
ness are suitable for reuse), lancets, and scalpel
blades, use small plastic beakers or jars in which to
wash and rinse these items and plastic strainers
to collect them after washing and between water
rinses to avoid pricks and cuts. Always wear protec-
tive gloves when cleaning laboratory-ware.
Sterilization of cleaned laboratory-ware prior to
reuse is necessary for microbiology culture work,
e.g. specimen containers, petri dishes, tubes,
pipettes, etc. Syringes and lancets must also be
sterilized before reuse (see subunit 4.8).
Chart 3.2 Processing of infectious and waste material and reuse of non-disposable items in district
laboratories
SPECIMENS Fluid specimens
In reusable containers: If the sink has running water and empties into the sewer system or septic tank, pour
fluid specimens through a plastic funnel down the sink and rinse the funnel and sink
with 2500 ppm chlorine or 5% v/v phenolic disinfectant. Boil the containers, c aps
and cap liners for 10 minutes at 100°C. If this is not possible, immerse the con-
tainers, caps, and liners overnight in 5% v/v phenolic disinfectant, 2 500 ppm
chlorine disinfectant or 1% w/v Virkon.
Clean each container in detergent, rinse well in water and drain dry. If sterile
containers are required, autoclave them at 121°C for 15 minutes.
Urine and other supernatant fluids
Discard supernatant fluids through a funnel held in the lid of a plastic 1 litre capacity
container to which has been added 20 ml of a concentrated phenolic disinfectant.
When the fluid level reaches 1 litre, empty the container (do not add supernatant
fluids to previously diluted disinfectant solutions). Decontaminate the empty tubes
or bottles and clean them as described previously for fluid specimens.
72 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.4
Faeces
Use disposable containers for faeces. Dispose of the specimens by incineration.
Sputum
If not liquified, decontaminate sputum by autoclaving at 121°C for 15 minutes or
place the container in boiling water and boil at 100°C for 20 minutes. Discard the
decontaminated specimen in the latrine or in a deep covered pit and clean the
container. If liquified, use the procedure for fluid specimens.
In disposable containers: Dispose of the specimens by incineration.
HAEMATOCRIT TUBES Immediately after reading, discard the tubes into a puncture resistant container for
incineration or burial in a deep covered pit.
Note: If a capillary tube is found to have broken in the centrifuge, wearing gloves
and using forceps, remove the broken glass pieces and clean the centrifuge with a
rag soaked in 5% v/v phenolic disinfectant. Place the rag with the pieces of glass in
a puncture resistant container for incineration.
SWABS Immerse swabs in 5% v/v phenolic disinfectant overnight before disposing of them
in a deep pit.
CULTURES Prior to disposal, de contaminate all cultures by autoclaving them at 121°C for 15
minutes.
MICROSCOPE SLIDES Soak used slides overnight or for at least 1 hour in 2500 ppm chlorine disinfe ctant
or 1% w/v Virkon (detergent as well as disinfectant) in a plastic container. If there is
oil on a slide, use forceps and a piece of rag or tissue soaked in disinfectant to wipe
off the oil before soaking the slide. With care, wash the slides in detergent using a
soft brush. Rinse well in water and dry between cotton cloths. When completely dry,
store the slides in boxes.
COVER GLASSES Only No 2 thickness cover glasses should be reused (No 1 cover glasses are too
Reuse only fragile). Using a piece of stick, transfer a cover glass from a slide to a small plastic jar
when essential or b eaker containing 5% v/v phenolic disinfectant or 1% w/v Virkon. Soak overnight or
for at least 1 hour.
Use a plastic sieve to collect the contents of the jar or beaker. Transfer a few cover
glasses at a time to a container of detergent (not necessary if Virkon has been used),
and swirl gently. Pour off the detergent and run water on the cover glasses to wash
off the detergent. Use a plastic sieve to recover the cover glasses and dry them
between two pieces of cotton cloth. Discard any damaged cover glasses into a
puncture resistant container.
PIPETTES Immediately after use, soak pipettes for at least 1 hour in 2500 ppm chlorine
disinfectant or 1% w/v Virkon in a sufficiently tall container to allow complete
immersion of each pipette and the expelling of air bubbles. Do not overcrowd the
container.
Caution: Use a separate container for glass Pasteur pipettes as the stems of these can be easily
broken.
Wash reusable pipettes in detergent (not necessary if Virkon has been used), rinse
well in water, and drain dry. Use a rubber bulb to expel the water from each pipette.
Bury disposable pipettes in a deep covered pit.
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 73
3.4
LANCETS Immediately after use, immerse the lancets in a small plastic jar or beaker containing
Reuse only 1000 ppm chlorine or 1% w/v Virkon. Soak for 20 minutes. Use a plastic sieve to
when essential re cover the lancets from the container. Clean as described for cover glasses. Lancets
must be sterilized before reuse.
Autoclaving stainless steel lancets
Wrap each lancet in a small piece of non-shiny paper (can be reused). Place the
wrapped lancets in a small polypropylene or metal container and with lid removed,
sterilize at 121°C for 15 minutes. Replace the lid.
Boiling lancets
If unable to sterilize by autoclaving or because the lancets are part plastic, boil in
water at 100°C for 10 minutes together with small glass or polypropylene tubes into
which the lancets can be placed after boiling. Use flame sterilized forceps
to transfer each lancet to its tube. Plug each tube with non-absorbent cotton wool.
SYRINGES Immediately after use, rinse through with 1000 ppm chlorine disinfectant. Remove
Reusable glass, nylon, the plunger from the barrel and immerse plunger and barrel in a container of
polypropylene syringes 1 000 ppm chlorine disinfectant or 1% w/v Virkon for 1 hour. Wash and rinse well
in several changes of water. The syringes must be sterilized before reuse.
Autoclaving syringes
Wrap each syringe, barrel alongside plunger, in a piece of cotton cloth or non-shiny
paper and autoclave at 121°C for 15 minutes.
Boiling syringes
If autoclaving is not possible, boil the syringes in water at 100°C for 10 minutes with
a container in which to place the syringes after boiling. Use flame sterilized forceps
to remove and assemble the syringes. Use the syringes only when they are
completely dry.
TUBES Immerse overnight or for at least 1 hour in a container of 2500 ppm chlorine
disinfectant or 1% w/v Virkon. Make sure each tube is fully immersed with air
bubbles expelled. Do not overload the container.
Wash in detergent (not necessary if Virkon has been used) using a test tube brush,
rinse well in water and dry tubes facing downwards.
If sterile tubes are required, autoclave at 121°C for 15 minutes, with caps loosened.
Only glass or polypropylene tubes or vials can be autoclaved. If unable to autoclave,
boil the tubes with caps and cap liners in water at 100°C for 10 minutes. Use flame
sterilized forceps to remove and cap the tubes when dry.
OTHER GLASSWARE As for tubes.
PLASTICWARE
DISPOSABLE WASTE
Syringes
Incinerate and bury the waste in a deep covered pit.
Contaminated cotton wool, Disc ard into a separate container and cover with a lid. Incinerate and bury the waste
swabs, dressings in a deep covered pit.
Reuse only
when essential
74 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.4
Broken glass, Discard into a puncture resistant container. Incinerate and bury the waste in a deep
disposable needles, covered pit.
lancets, other ‘sharps’
CLEANING OVERALLS Prior to laundering, decontaminate laboratory protective clothing and other
contaminated clothing by soaking overnight in 1000 ppm chlorine disinfect ant.
REUSING GLOVES Rinse gloved hands thoroughly in 1 000 ppm chlorine disinfectant followed by
several rinses in clean water (do not soak the gloves in disinfectant). Wash gloved
hands with soap and water. Remove the gloves and hang them by the cuffs to dry.
Wash hands and arms thoroughly.
When dry, examine the gloves for damage. Discard any gloves that are peeling,
appear cracked, have punctures or tears, or appear damaged in any other way. Test
the gloves for small holes by filling them with water and squeezing. If intact, turn the
gloves inside out to dry. When dry sprinkle the inside with talcum powder.
DECONTAMINATING Use 2500 ppm chlorine disinfectant to decontaminate work surfaces at the end of
BENCH SURFACES each day. Use 5% phenol disinfectant or phenol solution on benches which may be
contaminated with mycobacteria.
Spillages
Soak up any spillage of infectious material with Virkon powder disinfectant, NaDCC
granules or if unavailable use rags soaked in 10000 ppm chlorine. Always wear
protective gloves.
STERILIZING WIRE Decontaminate and sterilize by flaming until red hot. Allow to cool before use.
LOOPS BLADES, ENDS Whenever possible, use a hooded Bunsen burner.
OF FORCEPS
Notes
See Table 3.1 for the preparation of 1000 ppm, 2500 ppm and 10000 ppm chlorine solutions. Wear
gloves and a face visor or goggles when preparing all disinfectant solutions.
When clean running water is not available for rinsing washed laboratoryware, use filtered rain water.
Always wear protective gloves and a plastic apron when decontaminating and disposing of specimens.
When disposing of waste from an incinerator, wear a dust mask.
3.5 Chemical and reagent
hazards
Hazards associated with the transport, storage, and
handling of chemicals include fire, explosion and the
effects from toxic (poisonous), harmful, irritating,
and corrosive chemicals. In district laboratories the
risks associated with the use of chemicals can be
minimized by laboratory staff knowing which chem-
icals are hazardous and how to handle and store
them correctly.
In tropical countries it is particularly important to
keep chemicals and reagents out of direct sunlight
and prevent their overheating in the laboratory or in
an outside store. Overheating can decompose many
chemicals, causing explosions, fire, or the formation
of toxic fumes.
Accurate records must be kept of all chemicals in
the laboratory. Chemicals and reagents must be
labelled clearly. In outreach laboratories those chem-
icals and reagents that are not required or are not
labelled must be sent to the nearest district hospital
laboratory for safe storage or disposal. The district
laboratory coordinator should supervize the packing
and transportation of these chemicals and reagents.
Most manufacturers of chemicals provide com-
prehensive hazard and safety information with their
products. Before storing or using a chemical, labora-
tory staff must read carefully the safety (S) and risk
(R) phrases written on the label of the container and
understand the hazard symbols used by manufac-
turers to identify chemicals that are:
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 75
3.5
Hazard identification and classification schemes
The symbols and hazard classification described above are
those used by manufacturers and users of chemicals in
European Community (EC) countries. Other countries ident-
ify and classify chemical hazards differently, e.g. according to
type including health, fire, instability, reactivity hazards, and
the degree of danger using a scale 0 to 4 where 4 extreme,
3 severe, 2 moderate, 1 minor and 0 no unusual
hazard.
FLAMMABLE CHEM ICALS
A flammable substance is one that readily ignites
(catches alight) and burns. Some flammable chemi-
cals are a more serious fire risk than others because
they ignite easily. Such chemicals have what is called
a low flash point temperature.
Flash point of a chemical: This is the lowest temperature at
which the vapour above a liquid can be ignited in air. The
lower a chemical’s flash point, the higher is the risk of an igni-
tion source igniting it. The most hazardous flammable chemi-
cals are those with flash points below ambient temperature
because they evaporate rapidly from open containers. See
also Chart 3.3 in subunit 3.7.
Classification of flammable chemicals
The term flammable has the same meaning as
inflammable (flammable is preferred).
Extremely flammable: Liquids with a flash point
below 0°C and a boiling point of 35°C or below, e.g.
acetone, diethyl ether.
Highly flammable: Liquids with a flash point below
21°C, substances which are spontaneously com-
bustible in air at ambient temperature, solids which
readily ignite after brief contact with flame or which
evolve highly flammable gases in contact with water
or moist air. Examples include absolute ethanol and
methanol, 70% and above ethanol and methanol,
methylated spirit, isopropanol (isopropyl alcohol),
toluene, alcoholic Romanowsky stains, acid alcohol,
other alcoholic reagents and indicators.
Flammable: Liquids with a flash point of 21°C or
more and below or equal to 55°C, e.g. glacial acetic
acid, acetic anhydride, xylene.
Safe storage and use of flammable chemicals
Storage
Keep only small quantities of flammable chemicals
and reagents on laboratory benches and shelves
(not over 500 ml amounts). Store stock supplies of
flammable chemicals particularly those that are ex-
tremely or highly flammable in a closed steel or thick
plywood box at ground level, preferably in an out-
side locked store that is cool and well ventilated,
h
i
Flammable
(extremely
and highly)
Oxidizing
Toxic
Harmful
Irritating
Corrosive
Explosive
Dangerous for
environment
including ventilation at or near floor level because
the vapours of most highly flammable liquids are
heavier than air. Label the container Flammable. Do
not store flammable and oxidizing chemicals
together.
Safe use
Keep the laboratory well ventilated to prevent
any build up of flammable gases and vapours.
Before opening a bottle containing a flammable
liquid, always make sure there is no open flame
within 2 metres such as that from a Bunsen
burner, spirit lamp, kerosene or gas burner.
When using ether or acetone allow a distance of
3 metres.
Ensure stock bottles and dispensing containers of
flammable liquids are tightly closed after use.
Do not light a match or use a lighted taper near
to a flammable chemical.
Do not store ether in a non-spark refrigerator.
Make sure no one smokes in or adjacent to the
laboratory. Display ‘no smoking’ notices.
Place dispensing containers of acetone, acid alco-
hol, methanol, and alcoholic Romanowsky stains
well away from the rack used to heat stain on
slides in the Ziehl Neelsen technique. Use trays
to hold the containers to prevent a flammable
liquid spreading should a spillage occur.
If needing to heat a flammable liquid, use a
waterbath. Never heat directly on a hotplate or
over an open flame. Do not flame the neck of a
bottle or tube containing a flammable substance.
When transporting Winchester bottles containing
flammable chemicals, use strong carriers fitted
with handles.
Control of fires involving flammable liquids
Fire caused by a flammable liquid is best controlled
by smothering the flames. If the fire is a small one
on a bench, cover the container or area with a lid or
a fire blanket (see 3.7). If the fire is on the floor, use
a dry powder chemical fire extinguisher or smother
the flames with a fire blanket, dry sand or earth.
Do not pour water on the flames of a flammable
liquid fire because the water will spread the fire,
especially if it is caused by a solvent such as xylene
which does not mix but floats on the surface of
water.
Note: Further information on the fire risks associated
with the use of flammable liquids can be found in
subunit 3.7 Fire safety.
76 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.5
OXIDIZING CHEMICALS
An oxidizing substance is one that produces heat or
evolves oxygen in contact with other substances
causing them to burn strongly or become explosive
or spontaneously combustible. Once a fire is started
the oxidizing substance promotes it and impedes
fire-fighting.
Oxidizing chemicals include hydrogen peroxide and
other strong peroxides, nitric acid, ammonium ni-
trate, sodium nitrite, perchloric acid, sodium chlorate,
chromic acid, potassium dichromate, calcium
hypochlorite bleach powder, and potassium per-
manganate.
Safe storage and use of oxidizing chemicals
Storage
Because oxidizing chemicals can produce much
heat when in contact with flammable substances,
organic materials and reducing agents, they must be
stored well away from such chemicals and other
chemicals with which they can react dangerously as
indicated in subunit 3.5.
Safe use
Always handle oxidizing chemicals with care.
Besides being fire-promoting, most oxidizing sub-
stances are dangerous to skin and eyes.
TOXIC, HARMFUL AND IRRITATINGCHEMICALS
A toxicsubst ance is one that can cause serious acute
or chronic effects, even death, when inhaled, swal-
lowed, or absorbed through the skin. The term very,
or highly, toxic is used if the substance is capable of
causing serious effects.
Toxic chemicals include potassium cyanide,
mercury (e.g. from broken thermometers), mercury
11 (mercuric) nitrate, sodium azide, sodium nitro-
prusside, thiosemicarbazide, formaldehyde solution,
chloroform, barium chloride, diphenylamine, and
methanol.
A harmful substance is one that can cause limited
effects on health if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin.
Harmful chemicals include barium chloride,
benzoic acid, potassium oxalate, saponin, xylene,
iodine, and sulphanilic acid.
An irritating chemical is one that c an cause inflam-
mation and irritation of the skin, mucous mem-
branes, and respiratory tract following immediate,
prolonged or frequent contact.
Irritants include ammonia solution, acetic acid,
sulphosalicylic acid, potassium dichromate, and
formaldehyde vapour.
Safe storage and use of toxic, harmful and
irritating chemicals
Storage
Highly toxic chemicals such as potassium cyanide
must be kept in a locked cupboard. Stock solutions
or solids of harmful and irritating chemicals should
be stored safely in a cupboard, not on an open shelf.
Safe use
Handle toxic, harmful, and irritating chemicals
with great care and wash the hands immediately
after use. Wear suitable protective gloves, and if
indicated a face dust mask, visor or eyeshields,
and a plastic protective apron.
Ensure an eyewash bottle is accessible to rinse
the eyes should a toxic, harmful or irritating
chemical enter the eye (see Plate 3.2).
Always lock away highly toxic chemicals im-
mediately after use and never leave such chemi-
cals unattended. Minimize exposure to highly
toxic chemicals.
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 77
3.5
Whenever possible, handle chemicals with an
irritating or harmful vapour in a fume cupboard.
If this is not possible, ensure the laboratory is well
ventilated while the chemical is being used.
Before opening a chemical with an irritating
vapour, place a cloth over the neck of the con-
tainer and cap.
Keep containers tightly closed.
Never mouth-pipette any chemical or reagent.
Always use a pipette filler, automatic dispenser or
pipettor.
Injuries caused by mouth-pipetting chemicals
and reagents
The following are the main ways a person can be
injured by mouth-pipetting chemicals and reagents.
accidentally sucking up reagents into the mouth,
e.g. when rapidly sucking up in a narrow bore
pipette or when a reagent is contained in a
brown bottle or opaque plastic container and the
level of fluid is low and cannot be seen clearly.
putting a pipette in the mouth after its end has
been in contact with a harmful reagent, disinfec-
tant, or dry chemical picked up from the bench
or carried on the fingers.
inhaling poisonous or irritating fumes, e.g. from
acetic acid, concentrated hydrochloric acid, or
formalin solution.
Accidents involving toxic, harmful, and
irritating chemicals
The First Aid treatment for poisoning and injuries
caused by toxic, harmful and irritating chemicals is
described in subunit 3.8.
Allergenic, carcinogenic, mutagenic and teratogenic
substances
Some toxic chemicals are known to cause or are suspected of
causing specific types of disease or of affecting particular
organs or functions of the body as follows:
Allergen: Causes in some people allergic or hypersensitivity
reactions, e.g. skin contact resulting in dermatitis and inhala-
tion resulting in asthma or related conditions.
Carcinogen: Causes or increases the risk of cancer usually
after repeated or long term exposure. Chemicals with proven
carcinogenic properties include benzidine, o-tolidine,
o-toluidine, o-dianisidine, alpha- and beta-naphthylamine,
nitrosophenols, nitronaphthalenes, and selenite.
Mutagen:Capable of producing mutations of germ cells lead-
ing to genetically induced malformations, spontaneous abor-
tion or death of the offspring of an exposed individual.
Exposure of a mother to certain mutagenic chemicals during
pregnancy may result in cancer developing in her offspring
many years later.
Plate 3.2 Left: 500ml emergency eye wash bottle. Squeezing
the bottle gently sprays the eye. The waste liquid flows
through a tube to the sink or collecting vessel. Instructions for
use are printed in green on the bottle. Right: Protective eye-
shields with closed in sides. The goggles are made from poly-
carbonate.
Teratogen:Can damage an unborn foetus causing congenital
malformations, foetal death, or cancer in the offspring many
years later.
Note: Further details regarding the toxicity of chem-
icals and a list of the reported acute and chronic
effects of some chemicals can be found in the WHO
Laboratory Biosafety Manual.
3
Chemical manufac-
turers upon request will provide data sheets for the
chemicals they produce. Essential safety information
can also be found on the labels of containers.
CORROSIVE CHEMICALS
A corrosive chemical is one that when ingested,
inhaled, or allowed to come in contact with skin can
destroy living tissue and is also capable of damaging
inanimate substances.
Examples of corrosive chemicals include phenol,
strong acids such as concentrated sulphuric acid,
nitric acid, glacial acetic acid, trichloroacetic acid,
o-phosphoric acid, caustic alkalis such as sodium
hydroxide (caustic soda), and potassium hydroxide
(caustic potash), and some concentrated disinfectant
solutions.
Safe storage and use
Storage
Corrosive chemicals should be stored at low level to
avoid injury which could be caused if such chemicals
were accidentally knocked off a shelf. Do not store
potassium hydroxide or sodium hydroxide in a
bottle having a ground glass stopper because these
chemicals absorb carbon dioxide from the air form-
ing carbonates which can cement the stopper in the
bottle.
Safe use
Never mouth-pipette a corrosive chemical (see
also previous text). The accidental swallowing of
a corrosive chemical can cause severe internal
injury.
Always pour a corrosive chemical at below eye
level, slowly and with great care to avoid splash-
ing.
Wear suitable protective gloves and a face visor
or at least eyeshields, when opening a container
of a corrosive chemical and when pouring it.
Place a cloth over the neck and cap of the
container when opening it.
Dissolve a solid corrosive chemical such as
sodium hydroxide in water with great care, mix-
ing in small amounts at a time to dissipate the
heat produced.
78 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.5
When diluting concentrated acids, particularly
sulphuric acid, always add the acid to the water.
NEVER ADD WATER TO ACID. Adding water to
sulphuric acid can produce sufficient heat to
break a glass container.
When weighing corrosive chemicals, e.g. phenol,
avoid damaging the balance by ensuring the
chemical does not spill on the balance pan or
other metal parts. Use a suitable weighing con-
tainer and remove this from the balance pan
when adding or removing the chemical.
Always use a strong carrier to transport bottles of
corrosive chemicals.
Accidents involving corrosive chemicals
The treatment of burns caused by corrosive chemi-
cals is described in subunit 3.8. See later text for the
management of spillages involving corrosive
chemicals.
EXPLOSIVE CHEMICALS
Heat, flame, knocks or friction can cause explosive
chemicals to explode. Examples of explosive chemi-
cals include:
Sodium azide: This can form explosive products
when in contact with metals such as copper and
lead, e.g. in pipes.
Perchloric acid: If allowed to dry on woodwork,
brickwork or fabric, this chemical will explode
and cause a fire on impact.
Picric acid and pricrates: Picric acid must be
stored under water. If allowed to dry it can be-
come explosive. This can occur if the chemical is
left to dry in pipes without being flushed away
with an adequate amount of water.
Diethyl-ether and other ethers:When exposed to
air and sunlight, ether can form shock-sensitive
explosive peroxides.
Important: Always read carefully the manufacturers’
instructions regarding the storage and handling of
explosive chemicals. Few techniques in district lab-
oratory work require the use of explosive chemicals.
ENVIRONMENTALLYDANGEROUS CHEMICALS
These are substances that are dangerous for the en-
vironment because they can cause immediate or
long term harm to aquatic life, fauna and flora, or
pollute the atmosphere. Laboratory staff have a duty
to avoid chemical pollution of the environment.
Those in charge of district laboratory services
must ensure that the drainage and waste disposal
systems of district laboratories are safe, adequate
and in good repair. Hazardous chemicals and
reagents must not be discharged into open drains or
disposed of on open ground. Sufficient water must
be used when flushing hazardous chemicals and
reagents through the plumbing system.
The sewer system should not be used to dispose
of highly toxic chemicals, water-immiscible chemi-
cals, or substances that can react with metal
drainage pipes to produce dangerously reactive
products, e.g. sodium azide or picric acid. Advice
should be obtained from a qualified safety officer re-
garding the disposal of environmentally dangerous
laboratory chemicals.
SPILLAGECONTROL GUIDELINES
In the event of a serious chemical spill, evacuate
non-essential personnel from the affected area and
proceed as follows:
If there is personal injury or a hazardous chemi-
cal has been spilled on clothing, remove the
clothing and immediately wash and immerse the
affected part of the body in water. If the injury is
serious, apply appropriate First Aid measures and
seek medical advice.
If liquid chemicals (non-flammable) are spilled,
place sufficient dry sand or absorbent paper
around the spillage to prevent its spread and to
soak up the chemical. Wearing chemical resistant
gloves and using a plastic dustpan, collect the
material, neutralize it if a strong acid or alkali and
dispose of it safely.
Neutralization
Use 50 g/l (5% w/v) sodium bicarbonate or sodium car-
bonate to neutralize acid spills, and 10 g/l (1% v/v) acetic
acid to neutralize strong alkali spills. Clean the spillage
area with water and detergent.
If the spillage is a volatile flammable chemical,
immediately extinguish all flames, e.g. from
Bunsen and spirit burners. Open the windows
and doors to allow the spillage to evaporate.
Clean the area with water and detergent.
If the spillage is a solid chemical, wearing chemi-
cal resistant gloves and dust mask if appropriate,
collect the chemical in a plastic dustpan and dis-
pose of it safely by dissolving it in an adequate
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 79
3.5
volume of water and flushing it down the
drainage system. If water-immiscible or unsuit-
able for flushing down the plumbing system, mix
the chemical with sand and dispose of it in a
deep covered waste disposal pit. Clean the
spillage area with water and detergent.
Important: Follow any special spillage control
measures recommended by the manufacturer of a
chemical and display charts showing how to manage
chemical spills.
SAFETYGUIDELINES FOR COMPRESSED AND
LIQUEFIED GASES
The use of compressed gases should be avoided
whenever possible. Where their use is necessary, the
following safety measure should be applied:
Make sure all cylinders are clearly labelled and
correctly colour coded.
Display warning notices on the doors of rooms
where cylinders containing flammable gases are
used and stored.
Do not keep more than one cylinder of a flam-
mable gas in a room at any one time. Store spare
cylinders in a locked identified weatherproof
store at some distance from the laboratory.
Fix securely (e.g. chain) a gas cylinder to the wall
or a solid bench to avoid it being dislodged.
Do not locate compressed gas cylinders or lique-
fied gas containers near to radiators, naked
flames or other heat sources, sparking electrical
equipment, or in direct sunlight.
Always turn off the main high-pressure valve
when the equipment is not in use and when the
room is unoccupied.
Use a trolley to support compressed gas cylin-
ders when they are being transported (transport
with caps in place).
Do not incinerate single use gas cylinders.
Note: Gases for fixed items of equipment should
be connected by a drop level safety cock to per-
manent pipework using screwed union connectors.
Bunsen burners should also be controlled by a
safety cock. Installation of piped compressed air,
vacuum or gas system must be undertaken by a
qualified person.
80 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.5
Summary: preventing accidents involving chemicals and reagents
Identify and list all chemicals kept in the laboratory and stores. Maintain an up to date inventory and
information sheets on each chemical including its use, storage requirements, any known risk, and
instructions for its safe use. Request safety data sheets from manufacturers.
Before opening a chemical, always read the safety (S) and risk (R) phrases written on the label. Know
the hazard symbols for chemicals.
Label clearly all reagents with their name, date of preparation, expiry date (if of limited shelf-life), and
hazard symbol if indicated. Prepare written instructions on how to prepare each reagent safely.
Store each chemical and reagent correctly, making sure chemicals that can react dangerously
together, i.e. incompatible chemicals, are not stored together (see Chart 3.3).
Store stock containers of liquid acids, alkalis, corrosive and flammable chemicals at floor or low level
in drip trays to contain any spillage.
Keep chemicals and reagents out of direct sunlight and do not allow them to overheat.
Ensure the caps of containers are airtight and tightly closed, particularly of chemicals that are volatile,
flammable, hygroscopic, deliquescent or have a toxic or irritating vapour.
Do not use rubber liners in the caps of bottles containing iodine, ether, xylene or other chemical
which attacks rubber. Do not use ground glass stoppers in bottles containing potassium or sodium
hydroxide or other chemical that absorbs carbon dioxide from the air.
When opening a corrosive chemical or one with an irritating vapour, use a cloth over the cap and
neck of the container and wear chemical resistant protective gloves.
Keep the laboratory well ventilated when using hazardous chemicals particularly those that are
flammable or have a toxic or irritating vapour. Whenever possible use a fume cupboard.
When preparing reagents, always mix chemicals with care. Wear appropriate footwear and
protective clothing, e.g. laboratory overall, gloves, dust mask, eye goggles or face visor.
Ensure an eyewash bottle is available and accessible.
Never mouth-pipette, taste, or inhale a chemical or reagent.
Always wash the hands immediately after handling chemicals.
Use appropriate hazard symbols on the doors of cupboards storing dangerous chemicals.
Extinguish all open flames when using flammable and oxidizing chemicals and reagents. Ensure fire
fighting equipment is available and accessible.
Understand how accidents involving chemicals and reagents can occur and know what to do to
control and extinguish a chemical fire, treat a chemical spillage (see later text), and apply First Aid.
Use plenty of water when washing toxic, corrosive, flammable and volatile reagents down the
plumbing system, e.g. during staining.
Mercury from a broken thermometer: Do not discard mercury down the sink. Wearing gloves, carefully collect the
mercury using a stiff card and dustpan and discard it in a deep covered waste disposal pit.
Keep stores and cupboards containing stock and dangerous chemicals securely locked. Do not allow
unauthorized persons to enter the laboratory and never leave it unlocked when unoccupied.
Chart 3.3 SAFETY INFORMATION ON SOME CHEMICALS USED IN DISTRICT LABORATORIES
Important: Not all hazardous chemicals are included in this list. Always read carefully the storage
instructions and safety information printed on the container label. The source of the information in this
chart is the BDH/Merck Laboratory Supplies Catalogue.
CHEMICAL MAI N HAZARD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Corrosive, causing severe burns. Protect eyes, skin, clothing, and equipment.
Avoid breathing fumes. Use in well
ventilated area.
Irritant vapour Keep away from oxidizers, particularly nitric
acid, chromic acid, peroxides and
permanganates.
Flammable, with flash point 40°C.
Extremely flammable and volatile Keep away from sources of ignition,
with flash point 18°C. chloroform, chromic acid, sulphuric acid,
nitric acid and other oxidizers. Avoid
breathing fumes. Use in well ventilated
area. Protect eyes.
See Ethanol
Corrosive Protect eyes, skin, clothing, and equipment.
Place cloth over cap before removing it or
preferably use in a fume cupboard.
Irritant vapour Keep away from mercury and halogens
such as chlorine and iodine.
Harmful if ingested or inhaled. Protect against ingestion, inhalation, and
skin contact.
Harmful if ingested. Protect against ingestion, skin and eye
Irritating to the eyes. contact.
Corrosive Protect eyes, skin, clothing and equipment.
Contact with acids liberates toxic Keep away from acids, flammable
gas. chemicals, and combustible materials.
Oxidizing.
See Sodium hypochlorite solution.
Harmful if ingested or inhaled. Avoid breathing vapour. Use in a well
Irritating to the skin. Suspected ventilated area or preferably in a fume
carcinogen. Volatile with vapour cupboard.
that is anaesthetic. Toxic product Protect eyes and skin.
formed if heated. Attacks plastics Keep away from acetone.
and rubber.
h
Chloroform
Chlorine
solutions
Calcium
hypochlorite
bleaching
powder
h
Benzoic acid
h
Barium
chloride
i
Ammonia
solution
Alcohol
Acetone
i
Acetic acid,
glacial
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 81
3.5
CHEMICAL MAI N HAZARD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Corrosive Protect eyes, skin, clothing, and equipment.
Keep away from combustible materials,
acetone and other flammable chemicals.
Oxidizing
Extremely flammable with flash Protect eyes. Avoid breathing fumes. Use
point 39°C. in a well ventilated area or preferably in a
fume cupboard.
Irritant to eyes and respiratory Keep away from sources of ignition and
system. oxidizers.
Do not empty into drains.
Toxic if ingested, inhaled, or in Wear appropriate protection. Wash
contact with skin. immediately any affected area.
Highly flammable and volatile with Keep away from sources of ignition, silver
flash point 13°C. nitrate, and oxidizers.
Harmful if ingested.
Harmful if inhaled. Irritant to eyes, Protect skin and eyes. Use in a well
respiratory system, and skin. ventilate d area.
Also corrosive Keep away from oxidizers.
Extremely flammable, with Keep away from sources of ignition,
flashpoint 40°C. Volatile with oxidizers, iodine and chlorine. Do not
anaesthetic vapour. refrigerate. Store in opaque container, not
May form explosive peroxides plastic unless polypropylene. Do not use
when exposed to light. cap with rubber liner.
Use in well ventilated area or preferably in
a fume cupboard.
Harmful if ingested. Protect against ingestion and skin contact.
Toxic if ingested, inhaled, or in Wear appropriate protection. Use in well
contact with skin. Causes burns ventilate d area or preferably in a fume
and can cause dermatitis. Probable cupboard. Wash immediately any affected
carcinogen. area. Keep away from hydrochloric acid
Irritating and unpleasant odour. and oxidizers. Do not store below 21°C.
(Keep at 21–25°C).
Highly flammable with flash Keep away from sources of ignition.
point 12°C. Avoid inhaling fumes and contact with
skin.
Harmful if ingested. Irritating to Wear appropriate protection. Use in well
skin and respiratory system. May ventilated area.
cause dermatitis. Can damage eyes. Keep away from oxidizers.
h
Glutaraldehyde
Giemsa stock
stain (alcoholic
stain)
i
Formaldehyde
solution
h
Ethylene
glycol
(Ethanediol)
Ether, diethyl
h
Ethanolamine
Ethanol,
absolute
Diphenylamine
i
Diethylamine
Chromic acid
(reagent)
82 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.5
Corrosive, causing severe burns. Protect skin, eyes, clothing, and equipment.
Irritating to respiratory system. Do not breathe fumes. Use in well
Unpleasant corrosive fumes. ventilated area or preferably in a fume
Releases toxic fumes in fires. cupboard.
Keep away from alkalis, chromic acid,
potassium permanganate.
Corrosive Protect eyes, skin, clothing, and equipment.
Store in opaque non-metallic container.
Irritating to eyes, respiratory Keep out of direct sunlight in a cool dark
system, and skin. place away from flammable chemicals and
Stronger solutions are oxidizing. combustible materials.
Harmful if ingested, inhaled, or in Avoid skin and eye contact, and breathing
contact with skin. in vapour. Store iodine containing reagents
Irritating to eyes and respiratory in opaque container. Do not use caps with
system. rubber liners. Reacts violently with metals,
Evolves toxic fumes in fires. acetylene, and ammonia.
Harmful if ingested. Irritating to Protect against ingestion, skin and
the skin. Can cause eye damage. eye contact.
As for Giemsa stain.
Toxic by inhalation. May cause Ventilate area if mercury escapes from
dermatitis. broken thermometer (discard in deep
Attacks lead piping and soldered covered pit). Avoid skin contact.
joints. Keep away from ammonia, bromine,
Evolves toxic fumes in fires. azides, ethylene oxide.
Verytoxic if ingeste d. Toxic in Protect against ingestion and contact with
contact with skin and can cause skin. Minimize use. Wash hands
burns. immediately after use.
Keep in locked cupboard.
Verytoxic if ingeste d, inhaled, or Wear appropriate protection. Minimize
in contact with skin. use. Wash hands immediately after use.
Keep in locked cupboard.
Highly flammable with flashpoint Keep away from sources of ignition,
12°C. Volatile and hygroscopic. sodium hypochlorite, nitric acid,
chloroform, hydrogen peroxide.
Toxic if ingested or inhaled. Can Avoid breathing vapour. Protect skin and
cause dermatitis and damage optic eyes. Use in a well ventilated area or
nerve and central nervous system. preferably in a fume cupboard.
Corrosive, causing severe burns. Protect skin, eyes, clothing, and equipment.
Has irritating and harmful vapour. Avoid breathing fumes. Preferably use in a
fume cupboard. Use an eyewash bottle
Oxidizing immediately if acid enters eye.
Keep away from alkalis, metals, acetic acid,
chromic acid, reducing agents, flammable
chemicals and combustible materials.
Nitric acid,
concentrated
(fuming)
Methanol
(Methyl
alcohol)
Mercury 11
nitrate
(Mercuric
nitrate)
Mercury 11
chloride
(Mercuric
chloride)
Mercury
Leishman
stock stain
h
Iron 111
chloride (Ferric
chloride)
h
Iodine
i
Hydrogen
peroxide
solution
Hydrochloric
acid,
concentrated
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 83
3.5
CHEMICAL MAI N HAZARD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Toxic in contact with skin or if Protect skin, eyes, clothing, and equipment.
ingested or inhaled. Wash immediately any affected area.
Corrosive and hygroscopic. Keep container tightly closed. Store away
Oxidizes and turns pink on from oxidizers.
exposure to light.
Corrosive Protect skin, eyes, clothing, and equipment.
Evolves toxic fumes in fires.
Toxic if ingested, inhaled, or in Wear appropriate protection.
contact with skin.
Evolves toxic fumes in fires.
Explosive when dry. Can form Ensure chemical is always covered with
highly explosive salts with many water. Do not leave chemical to dry in
metals and explosive calcium pipes.
picrate when in contact with Keep away from reducing agents.
concrete. Note: If the water on top of the chemical has
evaporated, submerge the container in a bucket of
water overnight. Loosen cap carefully and fill to
the top with water (wear gloves and eyeshields).
Verytoxic if ingeste d, inhaled, or Wear appropriate protection. Wash
in contact with skin. immediately any affected area.
Contact with acid liberates very Keep in a locked cupboard away from
toxic gas. acids.
Do not empty into drains.
Irritating to the eyes, respiratory Protect eyes and skin.
system, and skin. May cause Avoid breathing dust.
dermatitis.
Corrosive Protect skin, eyes, clothing, and equipment.
Pellets are deliquescent. Store away from acids.
Do not use reagent bottles with glass
stoppers.
Harmful in contact with skin and Avoid contact with skin and eyes.
if ingested.
Oxidizing Keep away from combustible materials,
flammable chemicals, glycerol, ethylene
glycol, sulphuric acid.
Harmful if ingested.
Harmful if ingested. Irritating to Wear appropriate protection and avoid
skin and respiratory system. breathing in chemical.
Can damage the eyes.
Harmful if ingested and in contact Wear appropriate protection and avoid
with skin. inhaling powder.
h
Saponin powder
h
Salicylic acid
h
Potassium
permanganate
h
Potassium
oxalate
Potassium
hydroxide,
pellets and
solutions
i
Potassium
dichromate
Potassium
cyanide
Picric acid,
(solid)
o-Phosphoric
acid
Phenol
84 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.5
Corrosive and irritating to the eyes Protect skin, eyes, clothing, and equipment.
and skin. Keep away from ammonia solution,
May ignite combustible materials. ethanol, charcoal, and combustible
materials. Causes brown staining.
Verytoxic if ingeste d, inhaled, or Avoid contact by wearing appropriate
by skin contact. Mutagen. clothing. Do not inhale dust. Wash
Contact with acids liberates toxic immediately any affected area.
gas. Toxic gas liberated in fires. Keep in a locked cupboard away from
Violent reaction occurs if water is acids and metals.
added to heated solid. Do not flush down copper or lead drainage
Reacts with copper, lead, mercury systems.
to form explosive metal azide salts.
Harmful if ingested. Protect from skin contact. Keep away from
Contact with acid liberates toxic acids, flammable chemicals and combustible
gas. May cause fire. material.
Toxic if ingested. Irritating to eyes Protect skin and eyes.
and skin. Liberates toxic gas in Keep away from acids.
contact with acids.
Corrosive. Causes severe internal Protect skin and eyes, clothing, and
injury if ingested. equipment.
Deliquescent (pellets). Store in dry place, away from acids, methanol,
Heat evolved when mixed with and chloroform. Do not use reagent bottles
water. with ground glass stoppers.
Corrosive and toxic if ingested or Protect skin, eyes, clothing, and equipment.
inhaled. Irritating vapour. Use in well ventilated area.
May evolve toxic fumes in fires. Keep away from acids, methanol and
Liberates toxic gas in contact with oxidizers.
acids.
Toxic if ingested. Do not breathe dust.
*sodium nitrosopentacyanoferrate III
Toxic if ingested. Protect against skin contact.
Keep away from combustible materials and
flammable chemicals.
Oxidizing
Harmful if ingested, inhaled, or in Avoid contact with eyes and skin. Wear
contact with skin or eyes. appropriate protection.
Irritating to eyes and skin. Protect eyes and skin. Use in well
ventilated area.
Corrosive, causing severe burns. Protect skin, eyes, clothing, and equipment.
Toxic vapour. Avoid inhaling fumes.
Never add water to conc. sulphuric acid.
Keep in dry place away from alkalis,
potassium permanganate, perchlorates,
chlorates and flammable substances.
Sulphuric acid
i
Sulphosalicylic
acid
h
Sulphanilic
acid
Sodium nitrite
Sodium
nitroprusside*
Sodium
hypochlorite
solution
Sodium
hydroxide,
pellets and
solutions
Sodium
fluoride
h
Sodium
dithionite
Sodium azide
Silver nitrate
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 85
3.5
CHEMICAL MAI N HAZARD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Toxic and harmful if ingested. Minimize exposure.
Carcinogen. Wear appropriate protection.
Highly flammable, with flash point Keep away from sources of ignition.
4°C. Volatile. Wear appropriate protective clothing.
Keep away from oxidizers and do not
Harmful if ingested, inhaled, or by empty into drains.
skin contact. May cause dermatitis.
Vapour can be irritating to the eyes.
Toxic if ingested or inhaled. Minimize exposure and wear appropriate
Carcinogen. Irritating to the eyes. prote ction.
Reacts violently with acids. Keep away from acids.
Corrosive and hygroscopic. Protect skin, eyes, clothing, and equipment.
Unpleasant odour that is irritating
to the eyes.
May evolve toxic fumes in fires.
As for Giemsa stain.
Harmful if inhaled or in contact Protect from skin contact and use in well
with skin. May cause dermatitis. ventilated area.
Flammable with flashpoint 25°C. Do not keep in plastic containers unless
polypropylene. Do not use caps with
rubber liners.
h
Xylene
Wrights stain
Trichloroacetic
acid
o-Toluidine
solution
h
Toluene
o-Tolidine
86 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.5
CHEMICALS AND REAGENTS LISTED BY HAZARD
Extremely flammable
Acetone
Diethylamine
Ether, diethyl
Highly flammable
Acetone-alcohol
Acid alcohol
Alcoholic stains: Giemsa, Leishman,
Wrights, May Grunwald
Ethanol and alcohol
reagents
Methanol
Methylated spirit
Toluene
Oxidizing (fire-promoting)
Calcium hypochlorite
Chromic acid
Hydrogen peroxide (strong)
Nitric acid
Perchlorates
Potassium permanganate
Sodium nitrite
Toxic
Cadmium sulphate
Diphenylamine
Formaldehyde solution
Lactophenol
Mercury
Toxic continued
Mercury 11 chloride
(Mercuric chloride)
Methanol
Phenol
Picric acid
Potassium cyanide
Sodium azide
Sodium fluoride
Sodium nitrite
Sodium nitrosopenta-
cyanoferrate 111
(Sodium nitroprusside)
Thiomersal
Thiosemicarbazide
o-Tolidine
o-Toluidine
Harmful
Aminophenazone
Ammonium oxalate
Auramine phenol stain
Barium chloride
Benedicts reagent
Benzoic acid
Carbol fuchsin stain
Cetylpyridinium chloride
Chloroform
Copper 11 sulphate
Dobell’s iodine
Harmful continued
Ethylenediaminetetraacetic
acid (EDTA)
Ethylene glycol (Ethanediol)
Formol saline
Glycerol jelly
Glutaraldehyde
Iodine
Iron 111 chloride
(Ferric chloride)
Lugol’s iodine
Methylated spirit
Naphthylamine
p
-Nitrophenyl
Oxalic acid
Potassium oxalate
Potassium permanganate
Salicyclic acid
Saponin
Sodium deoxycholate
Sodium dithionite
Sodium dodecyl sulphate
Sodium tetraborate
Sodium tungstate
Stains (powder form):
acridine orange
auramine O
brilliant cresyl blue
crystal violet
3.6 Equipment and
glassware hazards
Fire, electric shock, and injury from moving compo-
nents are hazards associated with the use of equip-
ment. Most glassware hazards are associated with
breakages and the use of damaged glassware.
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 87
3.5–3.6
do not position e quipment where movement
of its components could cause injury.
do not loc ate equipment in a place where
access to it or cleaning will be difficult.
make sure the e quipment is level.
do not overcrowd a b ench with equipment
because this will reduce the working area,
and increase the risk of the equipment being
damaged from chemical spills and splashes
or items being placed on the equipment.
Make sure ventilation is adequate:
follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
do not cover or obstruct ventilation open-
ings.
place wire mesh over ventilation grills to
prevent insects and rodents entering.
make sure the chimney apertures of gas or
kerosene operated refrigerators and the
burner aperture of a flame photometer are
not obstructed or located under a shelf.
provide good ventilation when charging acid
rechargeable batteries.
Use a qualified electrician and follow the manu-
facturer’s instructions when installing electrical
equipment. Ensure:
the volt age of the new equipment is the
same as that of the electricity supply in the
laboratory and the voltage selector switch is
set correctly.
the power re quired by the instrument does
not exceed the power supply circuit of the
laboratory.
the e quipment is wired correctly using a fuse
of the correct rating, and the system has a
grounded conductor. The laboratory should
Harmful continued
Giemsa
Harris’s haematoxylin
malachite green
May Grunwald
methylene blue
neutral red
toluidine blue
Sulphanilic acid
Thiourea
Toluene
Xylene
Irritant
Acetic acid, glacial
Ammonia solution
Calcium chloride
Irritant continued
Formaldehyde solution
Hydrogen peroxide
Lactic acid
Naphthylethylenediamine
dihydrochloride
Potassium dichromate
Sodium carbonate
Sulphosalicylic acid
Zinc sulphate
Corrosive
Acetic acid, glacial
Ammonia solution
Calcium hypochlorite
Chromic acid
Fouchet’s reagent
Corrosive continued
Hydrochloric acid
Nitric acid
Phenol
o-Phosphoric acid
Potassium hydroxide
Silver nitrate
Sodium hydroxide
Sodium hypochlorite
Sulphuric acid
Thymol
Trichloroacetic acid
Explosive
Picric acid (when dry)
Sodium azide
PREVENTING EQUIPMENT RELATED ACCIDENTS
Safe positioning and installation of equipment
When installing and positioning equipment
consider both safety and convenience:
do not place ele ctrical equipment near to
water, in direct sunlight or close to where
chemicals and reagents are used or stored.
Equipment related accidents in district
laboratories
The safe use of equipment is dependent on:
equipment being installed and positioned
correctly.
equipment being used as instructed by the
manufacturer.
equipment being cleaned, inspected,
serviced and repaired correctly.
staff being well instructed in the correct use,
cleaning and maintenance of equipment.
the district laboratory coordinator ensuring
standard operating procedures (SOPs) and
maintenance schedules for equipment exist
and are implemented.
have sufficient earthed outlets. Circuit-
breakers and earth-fault interrupters should
be fitted to all laboratory circuits.*
*Circuit-breakers protect wiring from being over-
loaded with electric current. Earth-fault interrupters
protect people from electric shock.
the c able used is not longer than is
necessary, has no joins, is well insulated
and not positioned near water or hot
surfaces.
the use of multiple adaptors, temporary con-
nections, and extension leads is avoided
because these can lead to overheating and
bad connections.
Safe use of electrical equipment
Do not purchase or accept donated equipment
unless accompanied by a manufacturer’s instruc-
tion manual written in a language that can be
understood or accurately translated.
Use the equipment correctly:
whenever possible have new e quipment
demonstrated by the supplier.
prepare and display easy to underst and
instructions and safety precautions near to
the equipment.
Make sure staff are well instructed and trainees
adequately supervized:
to use and clean corre ctly the equipment in
their care.
to dry their hands and floor underfoot b efore
using electrical equipment.
to switch off and disconne ct the electricity
supply to an instrument by removing the
plug at the end of a day’s work and during
an electric storm (excluding refrigerators and
incubators).
to stop using and report imme diately any
malfunction of equipment.
to obt ain the help of an electrician to
check the electricity circuit should a fuse
‘blow’.
to apply First Aid following an e quipment
related injury (see subunit 3.8).
to ke ep careful records of equipment main-
tenance, servicing and repair.
Important: District laboratories should b e supplied
with a dry chemical fire extinguisher to control an
electric fire (see also subunit 3.7).
88 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.6
Cleaning, maintenance, inspection and
servicing of equipment
Perform cleaning, maintenance and servicing as
recommended by the manufacturer:
prepare S OPs and a written maintenance
schedule for each piece of equipment with a
checklist of the tasks to be performed at
specified times.
always turn off and disconne ct equipment
before carrying out cleaning, maintenance,
and inspections.
inspe ct equipment regularly for corrosion,
worn components, damaged insulation,
frayed cable, loose connections, fungal
growth, insect and rodent infestation.
Hold stocks of essential components with their
part numbers and sources of supply. If unable to
obtain spares from the manufacturer make sure
the specifications of alternatives are correct, e.g.
dimensions, fuse ratings, voltage and wattage of
lamps etc. When purchasing spares, always state
the model number of the equipment and date it
was purchased, and the supplier’s part number.
Note: The use and maintenance of different items of
equipment can be found in Chapter 4. Publications
covering the safety and maintenance of laboratory
equipment include WHO Maintenance and repair of
laboratory, diagnostic, imaging and hospital equip-
ment
9
and the WHO Laboratory Biosafety Manual,
3
PREVENTING GLASSWARERELATED ACCIDENTS
Although plasticware is increasingly being used in
district laboratories, glass pipettes, capillaries, test
tubes, specimen containers, flasks, beakers, slides
and coverglasses continue to be used because they
are easier and cheaper to obtain, clean, and reuse.
For some items there are no appropriate plastic
alternatives. It is therefore essential for district lab-
oratories to include in their code of safe working
practices, effective measures to prevent injury and
infection from broken and damaged glassware.
Correct purchasing of glassware
Avoid purchasing glassware classified as ‘dispos-
able’. Such glassware is usually thin walled and
not intended for cleaning and reuse. If needing
to reuse cover glasses, purchase thicker No. 2
glasses.
Ensure glassware that is to be used at high temp-
erature, or heat sterilized is made from Pyrex or
other heat resistant glass.
Safe handling of glassware
Use appropriate plastic containers for soaking
and decontaminating used glassware. Minimize
damage, breakage, and risk of injury by:
not overfilling cont ainers,
using separate cont ainers for fragile cover
glasses, slides, and sharp ended Pasteur
pipettes.
Before reuse, inspect glassware, particularly
tubes, pipettes and specimen containers for
cracks, broken and chipped ends.
Never centrifuge cracked tubes or bottles.
Flame until smooth the sharp ends of pipettes,
and the damaged rims of test tubes.
Wear protective gloves when cleaning glassware
and avoid overcrowding drainage racks.
Store glassware safely. Do not leave it in
open trays or other places where it can be
damaged.
To avoid spillages and breakages, use racks or
trays to hold specimen containers and other
bottles.
Safe management of breakages
Wear heavy duty gloves and use forceps to
collect broken glass. A piece of plasticine is use-
ful for collecting glass fragments.
Discard broken glass in a separate puncture
resistant waste bin marked ‘Sharps’ and dispose
of the contents safely. Do not allow the bin to
overflow.
Never leave used haematocrit (capillary) tubes
on a bench from where they can roll to the
floor.
When a breakage on the bench or floor occurs,
immediately collect the broken glass and
make sure the area is brushed and cleaned
well.
Wear suitable closed toe footwear. Wear protec-
tive gloves when unpacking new glassware.
Unpack the glassware in a safe place where any
broken glass from packing cases can be safely
contained.
Inspect regularly places where glassware is
stored for glass fragments, particularly drawers or
containers where glass pipettes, cover glasses,
and slides are kept.
Treat immediately any glass injury and cover
cuts with an appropriate dressing (see subunit
3.8).
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 89
3.6–3.7
3.7 Fire safety
A significant fire risk exists in small district labora-
tories due to the frequent use of matches and open
flames in close proximity to highly flammable chem-
icals and reagents such as acetone, diethyl ether,
methanol, methylated spirit, acid alcohol, and stains
that are alcohol-based.
Fire may also be caused by overheating in faulty
poorly maintained electrical equipment, overloading
of electrical circuits, use of adaptors, or overheating
of electrical motors due to inadequate ventilation.
Gas tubing or electric cables that are worn or too
long are also fire risks.
It is essential for district laboratory technical and
auxiliary staff to receive adequate instruction and
training in fire safety and appropriate fire fighting. A
local fire fighting service is unlikely to be available in
rural district areas.
Injury, damage and loss caused by fire can be
minimized when laboratory staff:
understand how fires are caused and spread.
reduce the risk of fire by following fire safety
regulations at all times.
– know what to do if there is a fire in their
laboratory.
know how to use fire fighting equipment.
know how to apply emergency First Aid for
burns.
Important: Those in charge of district laboratory
services must provide adequate training of labora-
tory staff in fire safety and equip district laboratories
with essential fire fighting equipment.
FIRE FIGHTINGEQUIPMENT
Fire fighting equipment for district laboratories
should include:
Buckets of water to extinguish paper, fabric and
wood fires. Water, however, must never be used
to extinguish an electrical fire or one caused by
a flammable chemical.
Buckets of sand or dry soil (kept free of refuse)
to smother flames and contain and extinguish a
free flowing liquid fire.
Fire blanket(s) made from heavy cotton twill
treated with a fire retardant chemical or prefer-
ably a manufactured fire blanket made from
woven fibre glass sandwiched between a fire
retardant material, to extinguish fire on personal
clothing or a small fire on the floor or bench.
Dry powder chemical fire extinguisher to
extinguish electrical fires and fires caused by
flammable liquids.
Whenever possible the laboratory should be
fitted with a battery operated smoke detector alarm.
It should be tested at regular intervals as
recommended by the manufacturer.
To alert those in and adjacent to the laboratory of
a fire danger, a fire alarm such as a loud handbell
or gong should be kept in a prominent place. When
facilities allow, a fire alarm system should be
installed.
90 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.7
Fire hazard of some commonly used chemicals
CHEMICAL FLASH POINT
8
CLASSIFICATION
Diethyl ether 40°C Extremely flammable
Class 1A
Acetone 18°C Extremely flammable
Class 1B
Toluene 4°C Highly flammable
Class 1B
Methanol 12°C Highly flammable
Class 1B
Ethanol, 13°C Highly flammable
absolute Class 1B
Isopropanol 12°C Highly flammable
Class 1B
Ethanol, 70% 21°C Highly flammable
Class 1B
Xylene 25°C Flammable
Class 1C
Acetic acid, 40°C Flammable
glacial Class 11
Classification terminology: Flash points with boiling points
are used to classify liquids by European terminology as
extremely flammable, highly flammable or flammable or by
United States terminology as flammable Class 1A, Class 1B,
Class 1C, or combustible liquids Class 11or Class 111.
Important fire risk reagents: Acid alcohol, alcohol/acetone
decolorizers, and stock alcoholic Romanowsky stains, e.g.
Leishman and Giemsa are classified as Highly flammable,
Class 1B.
Summary: Guidelines to reduce the risk
of fire in district laboratories
Do not allow smoking in the laboratory or in
adjacent outpatient waiting areas or corri-
dors. Display large No smoking signs.
Keep only small amounts of highly flam-
mable chemicals and reagents (classified in
subunit 3.5) on laboratory benches and
shelves. Whenever possible use plastic dis-
pensing containers that can be closed when
not in use. Keep them in a tray to retain the
flammable liquid should a spillage occur.
Store stock flammable chemicals and
reagents preferably in an outside cool store,
in trays, well away from oxidizing and other
incompatible chemicals (see subunit 3.5). If
this is not possible store the stock containers
at ground level in trays in a metal or thick
plywood box with a tight fitting lid.
When lighting and using a spirit burner,
Bunsen burner, or ring burner, always
check that there is no flammable chemical
or reagent nearby.
Be particularly careful when heating carbol
fuchsin stain on slides in the Ziehl-Neelsen
technique. Use only a small lighted swab
and extinguish it immediately after use.
Keep the flame well away from acid alcohol,
acetone, methanol, methylated spirits, ether,
stains such as Leishman and Giemsa, and
other flammable reagents.
Promote safety awareness by displaying
clearly written fire instruction notices in the
laboratory, review regularly fire safety rules
and practise every 6 months what to do in
the event of a fire.
Install electrical equipment safely (see sub-
unit 3.6). Inspect and maintain it. Do not
allow untrained personnel to repair equip-
ment.
Keep the laboratory well ventilated, when
using flammable chemicals and reagents to
prevent any build-up of flammable vapours
and gases.
Keep containers of flammable chemicals
and reagents tightly closed to prevent the
escape of flammable vapours.
If the laboratory is fitted with fire doors,
keep these closed. Make sure there is a safe
unobstructed marked exit route(s) from the
laboratory.
Whenever possible, ask advice from a
professional Fire Safety Officer on how to
implement and improve fire safety.
Note: The control of fires involving flammable
chemicals is described in subunit 3.5. The emer-
gency treatment of burns in subunit 3.8. Further
information can be found in the WHO Laboratory
Biosafety Manual
3
3.8 Emergency First Aid
Knowing what to do immediately an accident occurs
can help to reduce suffering and the consequences
of serious accidents. In some situations, First Aid can
be life saving, e.g. by resuscitation or the control of
bleeding. It can also prevent an injured person’s
condition from worsening, e.g. by protecting and
treating wounds, placing a person in the best poss-
ible position, offering reassurance, and seeking
immediate assistance.
TRAININGIN FIRSTAID
All laboratory workers should receive a practical
training in First Aid, with particular attention being
paid to the types of accidents that may occur in the
laboratory. They should also know what emergency
action to take if an outpatient or blood donor
collapses in the laboratory.
Training must be given by a person qualified to
teach First Aid. A certificate of competence should
be issued to those who complete the course suc-
cessfully. Refresher courses should be held every
3–4 years.
First Aid equipment
An adequately equipped First Aid box and eyewash
bottle should be kept in the laboratory in a place
that is known and accessible to all members of staff.
The First Aid box should be clearly identified by a
white cross on a green background. It should be
made of metal or plastic to prevent it being dam-
aged by pests and to protect the contents from dust
and damp. The contents should be inspected
regularly.
Recommended contents of a laboratory First Aid box
Clear instructions on how to apply emergency treatment
of cuts, bleeding, heat burns, chemical burns, chemical
injury to the eye, swallowing of acids, alkalis, and other
poisonous chemicals, treatment of fainting, electric shock,
and how to perform emergency resuscitation (illustrated).
Sterile unmedicated dressings to cover wounds.
Absorbent cotton wool.
Triangular and roll bandages and safety pins.
Sterile adhesive waterproof dressings in a variety of sizes.
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 91
3.7–3.8
Sterile eyepads with attachment bandages.
Roll of adhesive tape.
Scissors.
Sodium bicarbonate powder and boric acid powder.
Equipment for person giving First Aid (mouthpiece,
gloves).
Eyewash bottle
An eyewash bottle of the type shown in plate 3.2
(subunit 3.5) is suitable for district laboratories.
Clean tap water can be used to wash the eye. If no
clean tap water is available, sterile water or isotonic
saline should be used (kept next to the eyewash
bottle).
EMERGENCY FIRST AID PROCEDURES
First Aid applied to the laboratory should include
emergency management of the following:
Cuts, needlestick injuries Electric shock
Bleeding Heat burns
Resuscitation Chemical burns
Fainting Poisoning
A First Aid chart giving the immediate treatment of
cuts, bleeding, burns, poisoning, shock and resusci-
tation should be prepared and displayed in the
laboratory.
Emergency treatment of cuts and bleeding
If the cut is small:
wash with soap and water.
apply pressure with a piece of cotton wool.
disinfect the area with a skin antiseptic.
cover with a water-proof dressing.
Note: If the cut has been caused by contaminated
glassware or is a needlestick injury, encourage bleed-
ing before washing well with soap and water. Apply
a skin antiseptic and cover the area with a water-
proof dressing. Seek medical advice.
If there is serious bleeding from a limb:
raise the injured limb to reduce the bleeding.
apply pressure with a clean dressing backed with
cotton wool.
bandage the dressing in position.
immediately seek medical assistance.
Bleeding from the nose
seat the person upright with the head slightly
forward.
tell the person to pinch firmly the soft part of
their nose for about 10 minutes and breathe
through their mouth.
– if the ble eding does not stop, seek medical
advice.
Emergency resuscitation when a person stops
breathing
If a person stops breathing following an electric
shock or for any other reason, artificial respiration
(ventilation) must be applied as soon as possible (if
the brain is deprived of oxygen for more than about
4 minutes, permanent brain damage will occur). The
person may also require heart compression if there
is circulatory arrest, i.e. heart is not beating.
Mouth-to-mouth respiration (ventilation)
There are several ways to perform artificial respir-
ation. The most effective is mouth-to-mouth:
1 Lie the unconscious person on the floor.
Supporting the neck, tilt the head backwards
with the chin pushed upwards as shown in Fig.
3.9(1).
Important: This position is essential to keep the
person’s airway open.
2 If the person does not start to breathe, begin
immediately mouth-to-mouth respiration:
open your mouth wide and t ake a deep
breath.
pinch the person’s nostrils together with
your fingers.
press your lips around the person’s mouth.
blow into the person’s mouth (air will pass to
the lungs) until the chest is seen to rise.
remove your mouth and watch the chest fall
as the air escapes from the lungs.
repeat the inflation at the normal rate of
breathing, i.e. 10–15 breaths per minute.
Note: Give the first few breaths rapidly to
saturate the person’s blood with oxygen.
If you cannot get air into the person’s chest, check
that the head is tilted sufficiently far back, you have
a firm seal around the mouth, you have closed the
nostrils sufficiently, and the airway is not obstructed
by vomit, blood, or a foreign body.
Heart not beating
3 If after the first two inflations, natural breathing is
not restored, check whether the heart has
stopped beating.
92 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.8
Indications that the heart has stopped beating
are:
person remaining or b ecoming grey-blue.
no c arotid pulse being felt (see Fig. 3.10).
pupils of the eye appearing widely dilate d.
Take immediate action to restart the heart while
at the same time continuing mouth-to-mouth
respiration:
Be gin external heart compression by placing
the heel of your hand on the lower half of
the person’s breastbone and cover this hand
with the heel of your other hand as shown in
Fig. 3.11 (the palms and fingers of your hand
should be raised away from the person’s
chest so that pressure is not applied over the
ribs).
With your arms straight, press down rapidly
on the breastbone (once every second),
depressing it about 4 cm (1 in) then release
the pressure without removing your hands.
Look to se e whether there is an improve-
ment in the person’s colour indicating a
return of circulation. If there is no improve-
ment, continue compression and mouth-to-
mouth respiration.
If resuscitating by yourself, apply 15 heart
compressions followed by 2 quick lung
inflations and then repeat.
If there is someone else to help, apply 5
heart compressions, followed by 1 deep
inflation. The person carrying out the mouth-
to-mouth respiration should feel for a carotid
pulse.
4 Once natural breathing has b een restored
and the heart is beating, place the person in
the recovery position (see Fig. 3.8). This is
important because the person may vomit
and in this position there will be no danger
of choking.
5 Obt ain further medical assistance at the
earliest opportunity.
Note: Other forms of resuscitation will be required if
it is not possible to apply mouth-to-mouth respir-
ation. Alternative methods should therefore be
learnt.
Emergency treatment when someone faints
Emergency treatment of a faint is as follows:
lay the person down and raise the legs above the
level of the head (see Fig. 3.7).
loosen clothing at the neck, chest, and waist.
1
2
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 93
3.8
Fig. 3.7 Position in which to place a person who has fainted.
Fig. 3.8 The recovery position.
Fig. 3.10 Feeling for the carotid pulse
Fig. 3.9 Mouth to mouth ventilation during emer-
gency resuscitation. If the heart has stopped beat-
ing, perform external heart compression (see text
for details)
Fig. 3.11 Position of hands over lower breast bone when performing external heart compression.
Acknowledgement: Illustrations are reproduced by permission of St John Ambulance Association
Position of sternum Cross-section through chest
make sure the room is well-ventilated.
reassure the person as consciousness is regained.
gradually raise the person to the sitting position.
Sips of drinking water may be given.
Note: If breathing becomes difficult, place the
person in the recovery position shown in Fig. 3.8.
Emergency treatment when someone is
electrocuted
Carry out the following:
immediately turn off the electricity from the mains
if it can be reached easily, otherwise remove the
plug or wrench the cable free. DO NOT TOUCH
THE PERSON’S FLESH WITH YOU R HANDS
until the contact has been broken.
Important: On no account try to free an electrocuted
person from the electrical contact without using
some form of insulation material, such as a dry thick
cloth, folded laboratory coat, folded newspapers,
wooden or plastic stool or chair. If insulation is not
used, the person rescuing will also be electrocuted.
if the person has collapsed, send immediately for
medical help and if the person is not breathing,
give artificial respiration until assistance arrives.
Cool any burns with water.
Emergency treatment of heat and chemical
burns
Heat burns
if clothing is alight, smother the flames using a
fire blanket.
remove the person from the danger area.
immediately plunge the burnt area into cold
water or apply a pad soaked in cold water (or any
other non-flammable liquid) to the affected part
for 10 minutes.
cover with a dry dressing.
remove any constricting articles such as rings or
bracelets before the affected area starts to swell
and becomes blistered.
provide frequent small cold drinks.
Note: If more than a minor burn, seek medical treat-
ment immediately. Reassurance of the casualty is
important.
Chemical burns of the skin
wash immediately in running water for several
minutes, remove any contaminated clothing.
94 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
3.8
neutralize with a suitable chemical as follows:
If an acid burn, neutralize with sodium
bicarbonate powder.
If an alkali burn, neutralize with boric acid
powder.
seek medical attention.
Note: Respiratory symptoms may develop if fumes
from strong acids and alkalis have been inhaled.
Transfer the patient urgently for medical care.
Chemical injury to the eye
wash the affected eye as quickly as possible
under running tap water or with water from an
eye wash-bottle.
neutralize with a suitable chemical as follows:
If an acid injury, neutralize with 5% sodium
bicarbonate solution.
If an alkali injury, neutralize with 5% acetic acid
or vinegar diluted 1 in 5.
immediately seek medical attention.
Emergency treatment for poisoning
Swallowing of an acid or alkali
immediately rinse the mouth well with water.
neutralize with a suitable chemical as follows:
If acid has been swallowed, neutralize by drink-
ing 8% w/v magnesium hydroxide suspension
(milk of magnesia) or milk.
If an alkali has b een swallowed, neutralize by
drinking lemon juice or 1% acetic acid.
drink three or four cups of water.
seek medical attention.
Note: When an acid or alkali has been swallowed,
do not encourage vomiting.
Swallowing of other poisonous chemicals
rinse out the mouth well with water.
depending on the chemical swallowed, take a
suitable chemical antidote under medical super-
vision.
Note: Always seek medical advice and treatment
after swallowing toxic or harmful chemicals.
Swallowing of infected material
immediately seek medical treatment.
if required provide follow-up tests.
Mouth-pipetting: This is the main cause of the accidental
swallowing of chemicals or infected material in laboratories.
Further information: Full details of emergency
First Aid measures can be found in the colour pub-
lication:First Aid Manual of St John Ambulance, St
Andrew’s Ambulance Association and Red Cross
(see last entry under Recommended Reading).
REFERENCES
1 Essential medical laboratory services project: Malawi,
Final Report, 2002. Malawi Ministry of Health, Liverpool
School Tropical Medicine, DFID. Obtainable from
HIV/AIDS Dept, Liverpool School Tropical Medicine,
Pembroke Place, Liverpool, L3 5QA, UK.
2 McNerney R. Workplace protection from tuberculosis.
Africa Health, 2002, September, pp. 15–16.
3 Laboratory Biosafety Manual, 3rd edition, 2004. World
Health Organization, Geneva, NHO/CDS/CSR/LYO/
2004.11. Can also be downloaded from the WHO website
www.who.int/csr/resources/publications/biosafety
4 Recommendations on the transport of dangerous goods,
13th revised edition, 2003. New York and Geneva, United
Nations.
5 Transport of infectious substances, 2004. World Health
Organization, Geneva, WHO/CDS/CSR/LYO, 2004. Can
also be downloaded from WHO website www.who.int/csr/
resources/publications
6 Infectious substances shipping guidelines, 2003. Montreal
International Air Transport Association. Can be down-
loaded from website www.iata.org/ads/issg
7 Health Laboratory facilities in emergency and disaster
situations. World Health Organization, 1994 (WHO
Regional Publications Eastern Mediterranean Series, No.
6). Obtainable from WHO Regional Office, Abdal
Razzak, AC Sanhouri Street, PO Box 7608, Nasr City,
Cairo 11371, Egypt.
8 Carter J and Lema O. Practical Laboratory Manual for
Health Centres in Eastern Africa, 1994, AMREF, Kenya.
9 Maintenance and repair of laboratory, diagnostic imaging,
and hospital equipment. Geneva, World Health
Organization, 1994.
RECOMMENDED READING
Laboratory Biosafety Manual. Geneva, World Health
Organization, 2004, 3rd edition. Can be downloaded from
website www.who.int/csr/resources/publications/biosafety
Collins CH. Laboratory acquired infections: history, incidence,
causes and prevention, 4th edition, 1999. Arnold-Hodder
Headline.
Furr AK. CRC Handbook of laboratory safety, 5th edition,
2000. Boca Raton FL. CRC Press.
Guidelines for the collection of clinical specimens during field
investigations of outbreaks, World Health Organization,
WHO/CDS/CSR/EDC/2000.4, 2000.
Transport of infectious substances, World Health
Organization, Geneva, 2004. Can be downloaded from the
website www.who.int/csr/resources/publications
Guidelines for the prevention of tuberculosis in health care
facilities in resource limited settings. World Health
Organization, WHO/CDS/TB/99.269, 1999.
Website of the International Union against Tuberculosis and
Lung Diseases, www.iuatld.org
HEALTHANDSAFETYINDISTRICTLABORATORIES 95
3.8
WHO health-care waste managementwebsite:
www.healthcarewaste.org
Halbwachs H.Solid waste disposal in district health facilities.
World Health Forum, 1994, Volume 15, pp. 363–367.
First Aid Manual of St John Ambulance, St Andrew’s
Ambulance Association and British Red Cross. Dorling
Kindersley, revised 6th edition, 2004. Supplied with free
booklet covering emergency procedures, suitable for First Aid
kits. Obtainable from Pearson Educational, Edinburgh Gate,
Harlow CM20 2JE, UK, priced £11.99 (2005).
96 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
4
Equipping district laboratories
4.1
4.1 Selection, procurement
and care of equipment
The importance of having an effective equipment
management policy has been discussed in subunit
2.1 and equipment safety in subunit 3.6. This sub-
unit covers the selection and purchase of equipment
and how to keep it in working order in district
laboratories.
SELECTING AND PROCURING
LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
The majority of district hospital laboratories will
require the basic equipment listed in Table 4.1. The
equipment needed by health centre laboratories will
depend on the range of tests performed.
programme different functions (operating modes),
e.g. balances, autoclaves, colorimeters, centrifuges,
water baths, incubators, heat blocks and mixers.
Such microprocessor-based digital display equip-
ment is usually more accurate, versatile, efficient,
and has more built-in safety features than traditional
analogue electronic equipment. Some micro-
processor controlled equipment, however, can be
expensive and complex to use, necessitating a
longer training to use it correctly. It can also be more
difficult to repair in the field.
In this chapter, analogue electronic equipment is
included when this is considerably cheaper than
microprocessor equipment, meets the required
specifications for district laboratory work, and is
easily obtainable. Microprocessor controlled equip-
ment is included when this is easy to use, affordable,
meets the specifications required, is safer to use, has
a proven track record, and is more available.
Standardization of district laboratory
equipment
Whenever feasible, equipment for use in district lab-
oratories should be standardized. This can facilitate
installation, training of laboratory staff, local main-
tenance and repair. Also, lower prices are usually
available when purchasing equipment and replace-
ment parts in quantity. Ideally the equipment should
be available from more than one source for price
comparison and ease of availability.
Clearlythere are significant benefitsin standardiz-
ing basic equipment and having a national standard
laboratory equipmentlist but there can also be prob-
lems whene quipmentis not sufficiently tested in the
laboratoriesin whichit willb eused beforethe decision
to purchaseis made. Standardization may also make
itmore difficult to change technological methods.
Aggressive marketing by suppliers can also be a
problem when it becomes known that a bulk pur-
chase is being considered. Attractive discounts and
incentives may be offered for a ‘quick sale’ without
the purchaser being given the opportunity to study
sufficiently the specifications of the equipment, read
the manufacturer’s User Service Manual, and be
assured that spare parts are available and will remain
so for an appropriate period of time.
Table 4.1 Basic equipment for district
hospital laboratories
Microscope
Equipment for purifying water
Balance
Equipment for pipetting and dispensing
Centrifuge(s)
Autoclave
Incubator (for culturing micro-organisms)
Water bath and, or, heat block
Colorimeter
Mixers and rotator
General laboratory-ware
Safety equipment
Note:The specifications, use and care of the above listed
equipment are covered in this chapter except safety
equipment which is included in Chapter 3. Haemoglobin
meters and electrophoresis equipment are described in
Chapter 8 in Part 2. Glucose meters are described in
subunit 6.5 and flame photometers in subunit 6.10.
Microprocessor controlled equipment
Many items of laboratory equipment are now micro-
processor controlled with the user being able to
Relevant standardization may be difficult to
achieve when equipment is donated, particularly
when an overseas donor wishes to supply equip-
ment manufactured in their own country which may
not be appropriate for use in the recipient’s labora-
tory. If, however, the equipment is on the national
standard equipment list, the donor should respect
this and supply the equipment that is specified. This
aspect of equipment procurement is covered later in
the text (see Equipment donation guidelines).
Procurement of laboratory equipment
In developing countries, laboratory equipment is
usually procured in one of three ways:
purchased nationally through a local supplier
(agent).
purchased from an overseas manufacturer or
their distributor, often by tender.
procured through a donor body.
Procurement through a local supplier
Purchasing nationally has the advantage that local
currency can be used to buy the equipment and its
consumables. The supplier is responsible for import-
ing the equipment and checking it on arrival.
Usually it is also possible for the purchaser before
buying the equipment to have it demonstrated and
ask the supplier about specifications, power require-
ments, and maintenance. The User Service Manual
can also be studied. An authorized supplier will
usually stock essential replacement parts and local
repair facilities will often be available.
The main disadvantages of using a local supplier
are that the choice of equipment and range available
are usually limited, the cost of the equipment can be
high particularly if there is no other local supplier,
and the manufacturer’s warranty conditions may not
be accepted by the supplier.
Note: Whenever possible, before purchasing
expensive equipment through a local supplier, the
purchaser should check with the manufacturer that
the supplier is one that is authorized and
recommended.
Procurement from an overseas manufacturer or
distributor
This method of equipment procurement is often the
only one available to developing countries because
there is no local supplier for the equipment that is
needed. Advantages in purchasing from overseas
include greater choice of equipment and availability
EQUIPPING DISTRICT LABORATORIES 97
4.1
of up to date information on new equipment, lower
costs (but check also transport, insurance and import
charges), and greater opportunity for modifying
equipment to meet user requirements, e.g. need for
voltage stabilizer, or to use the equipment from a
12V DC lead-acid battery.
The main disadvantages are the need for foreign
currency, no ‘hands on’ experience before purchas-
ing, no after sales assistance such as help with
installation and training of staff in use and mainten-
ance of the equipment, and consumables, spares,
and repair facilities may not be available locally. The
purchaser also has the responsibility for importing
the equipment. If at a later stage a fault develops
and the equipment cannot be repaired locally, it can
be troublesome and expensive to return the equip-
ment to an overseas distributor.
Procurement through a donor body
While much laboratory equipment is successfully
donated and proves to be exactly what is needed,
inappropriate equipment may be donated when
there is little or no communication between the
donor and recipient (see later text).
It is particularly important that equipment is not
donated or accepted when its running and mainten-
ance costs are unaffordable, the information it
provides is of limited use or difficult to interpret, the
equipment is obsolete, no spares are available, or it
is unsafe.
Preventing errors when selecting and
procuring equipment
The following guidelines can help to avoid resources
being wasted due to the incorrect selection and
procurement of laboratory equipment:
Before placing an order
Discuss and decide what is required based on:
why the e quipment is needed, how it will be
used, and who will be responsible for its use
and maintenance.
present and anticipate d workload.
loc al power supplies, and climate.
available space and ventilation.
health and s afety considerations.
whether the e quipment will require any
special facilities or additional supplies, e.g.
voltage stabilizer, greater purity of water, air
conditioning, etc.
Provide the supplier (manufacturer, distributor,
donor) with sufficient information including:
what functions the e quipment needs to per-
form, and extent of its use, e.g. workload.
level of skill of the persons who will b e using
and maintaining it.
as much det ail as possible about local
facilities.
information on the climate and environment,
e.g. temperature range, whether problems of
corrosion and fungal growth exist due to
high relative humidity, or dry dusty
conditions prevail.
Ask the supplier for information and illustrations
of the equipment that meets or comes closest to
fitting the specifications, including:
cost of the e quipment, replacement parts
(spares) and if required, consumables.
cost of transporting the e quipment and
insuring it in transit.
what is the expe cted working life of replace-
ment parts.
source(s) of spares, consumables, and det ails
of the nearest authorized repairer.
what are the power re quirements and per-
formance specifications of the equipment.
how is the e quipment used (detailed instruc-
tions are required).
inst allation information.
what control che cks are required.
what is the maintenance sche dule (request a
copy of the Service Manual).
are any evaluation reports available.
has the e quipment been field-tested in any
tropical country.
what are the s afety features.
how long has the e quipment been in pro-
duction and how long will the spares remain
available.
what warranty is supplie d.
Evaluate and discuss the information received
from the supplier, studying particularly:
whether the e quipment has the features that
are needed and any other useful specifi-
cations.
whether the purchase price and anticipate d
operating and maintenance costs, and
reagent costs, can be afforded,
whether the e quipment will be cost-effective
to use, compared with existing or alternative
technologies.
whether the e quipment appears easy to use
98 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
4.1
and maintain by laboratory staff and how
much training will be needed.
whether the e quipment is of safe design.
Note: Equipment designs are changing rapidly. A
purchaser should not hesitate to ask a supplier to explain
any unfamiliar terminology or the purpose of any
optional feature or accessory.
Select the most appropriate equipment for the
job, i.e. what is relevant and affordable, sim-
plest, and easiest to use and maintain. The
simplest design of equipment will often b e
the most reliable and remain working the
longest.
If the supplier is a local supplier:
re quest a demonstration of how to use the
equipment (including the fitting of replace-
ment parts).
study c arefully the User Service Manual.
ask ab out any after sales service, particularly
staff training, assistance with installation,
maintenance and servicing facilities.
confirm that the e quipment is in current
production.
che ck the conditions of the warranty.
obt ain a written quotation and discuss terms
of payment and delivery.
If the supplier is an overseas distributor:
re quest a quotation for the equipment.
indic ate how you would like the equipment
to be transported e.g. airfreighted, or sent by
air parcel post and request a quotation for
the transport and in-transit insurance.
ask how soon after re ceiving an order and
agreeing payment terms, the equipment will
be despatched.
re quest a copy of the User Service Manualto
be sent with the quotation for careful study
before placing an order.
User Service Manual
The User Service Manual is important because this
will detail (usually with illustrations) the operation
of the equipment, its power requirements, tempera-
ture range over which the equipment will perform
reliably, how the equipment should be controlled,
cleaned, and maintained, the recommended replace-
ment parts and their expected working life, and how
to identify and correct problems (trouble-shooting).
Users, however, should be aware that the Manual
supplied may describe the use of several different
models of similar equipment, not just the model
being considered.
Ask for confirmation that the e quipment is a
current model and ask for how long the
spares will be available.
Che ck from the nearest Customs and Excise
Office whether there are any import regu-
lations covering the equipment, whether any
import duty and taxes will be charged and
whether any documentation is required
other than the international Customs decla-
ration and signed commercial invoice which
the distributor will send with the goods.
If the goods are airfreighted, a clearing agent
will be required to clear the goods through
Customs and a fee will be charged by the
agent.
Important: Whenever possible, obtain quotations
from several different suppliers of the equip-
ment. If prices between suppliers vary greatly,
recheck the specifications of the equipment with
each supplier. Always question the reason for any
unusual discount (possible discontinuity of
model).
Placing an order
Neverb e rushed into placing an order by a sales
person. Take adequate time to evaluate whether
the equipment is a priority and can be afforded.
Always consider and consult adequately.
Order correctly in writing, using an order num-
ber:
use the supplier’s code numb ers as well as
descriptions.
make sure all the items that are ne eded are
clearly specified and ordered, e.g. the rotor
and tube holders for a centrifuge or all the
optics for a microscope.
order essential replacement parts (the quan-
tity to order will depend on the anticipated
working life of each part and expected use of
the equipment in the laboratory).
for ele ctrical equipment, state the voltage,
frequency and phase required (see subunit
4.2).
st ate the price you have been quoted for the
equipment, its transport and insurance costs,
and any other agreed conditions, e.g. terms
of payment, despatch/delivery date, training
of staff, etc.
make sure the delivery address is clear.
If ordering from an overseas distributor, confirm
how you would like the equipment to be trans-
ported. Request careful packing to avoid damage
in transit. Ask the distributor to airmail in
advance of delivery, copies of the documentation
(signed commercial invoice(s) and packing
notes). If an import licence and, or, a Gift
EQUIPPING DISTRICT LABORATORIES 99
4.1
Certificate is required, send copies of these to the
supplier for sending with the equipment.
If the order is being airfreighted, provide a
fax number and, or, email address which the dis-
tributor can use to fax or email the flight details
(airline and flight number, airway bill number,
expected date and time of arrival) and an
advance copy of the commercial invoice.
Common causes of incorrect equipment
selection and procurement in developing
countries
Purchaser having to compromise because
the equipment that is needed is not avail-
able or will only become available after a
long delay.
Supplier receiving inadequate, non-specific,
or confusing information from a purchaser
(major cause of error in purchasing).
Ordering equipment from a brief descrip-
tion in a catalogue or from a promotional
leaflet without first obtaining further
information, particularly regarding power
requirements, availability of spares, use and
maintenance of the equipment.
Discontinued equipment or second-hand
equipment being purchased for which
replacement parts are not available or are
difficult to obtain.
A procurement officer disre garding the
request of the laboratory to buy equipment
from a specific manufacturer in favour of a
lowerprice tenderwithout rechecking quality
andspe cificationswith laboratory staff.
Donated funds being used to buy the latest
and most complex instrument without due
consideration as to exactly what is required
and the conditions in which the equipment
will be used.
Microprocessor controlled equipment being
selected without knowing the conditions for
its use and extent of user training required.
Analytical equipment being purchased or
donated that can only be used with the
manufacturer’sreagents for whichthere is no
localsupplier, and no possibility ofimporting
the reagents on a regular basis due to their
high costand lack of foreign currency.
Order being placed without consulting lab-
oratory staff, e.g. before staff are appointed
to a newly built laboratory.
100 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
4.1
Considerations when selecting major equipment for district laboratories
CLIMATIC CONSIDERATIONS
How will performance and durability of the
equipment be affected by:
high temperatures?
high relative humidity?
dusty environment?
USER MANUAL AND WARRANTY
Is a User Service Manual:
available to study before purchase?
adequate and easy to follow?
what warranty is supplied?
IMPORTED EQUIPMENT
Can regulations and charges be met
covering:
documentation?
customs duty, import taxes?
transport and insurance?
SPARES AND CONSUMABLES
what are needed and how often?
who is the supplier?
what are the current prices?
can any of the reagents, calibrants or
controls be made in the laboratory?
USE AND MAINTENANCE
How easy is the equipment to:
use?
control?
clean?
maintain in the workplace?
COST OF EQUIPMENT
Can the following be afforded?
capital cost?
transport and insurance?
operating costs?
cost of training users?
FACILITIES REQUIRE D
Does the laboratory have:
a suitable power supply?
sufficient space and ventilation for the
equipment?
adequate quality and quantity of water?
NEED
Is the equipment a priority and will it:
meet district health needs?
be correct for the workload?
improve efficiency?
RELIABILITY AND SAFETY
are any evaluations or field-testing
reports available?
what are the safety features?
is the equipment in current production?
is it possible to contact other users?
SUPPORT
Who will help to:
install the equipment?
train users?
perform maintenance schedules?
Important
A manufacturer, distributor, or donor will not be able to supply equipment of the correct specifications
unless the user provides the supplier with sufficient information. To evaluate and order equipment
correctly, the user must obtain sufficient and relevant information from the supplier(s).
Keep a copy of the order and use this when the
order arrives to check whether the correct items
have been sent. If there are any errors or dam-
age, notify the distributor in writing as soon as
possible.
Equipment donation guidelines
Donors and recipients need to communicate to
establish exactly what is required and to ensure that
the equipment supplied is medically, technically,
economically and environmentally appropriate and
can be operated safely.
Recipient responsibilities
Have clear policies and specifications of the equipment
that is required. Advize a donor if the equipment is on the
national standard equipment list.
Ask the advice of qualified equipment technicians regard-
ing installation of the equipment, its operation and main-
tenance, training requirements for users, essential parts,
and appropriateness of equipment based on running costs
and technical design.
Specify clearly which items should accompany the equip-
ment, e.g. technical documents (User Service Manual),
reasonable quantity of spares and consumables, and a
warranty covering the replacement and, or, repair of new
equipment. If only the manufacturer’s reagents can be
used with the equipment, ask the donor for the prices of
each reagent that will need to be imported.
Make a checklist to ensure a donor is fully informed
regarding: specifications of the equipment, functions it
needs to perform, staff that will install, use, and maintain
the equipment, where the equipment will be located, lab-
oratory conditions e.g. heat, humidity, dust, ventilation,
etc., and details of the facilities available including power
supply, need for voltage protection, and if applicable
details of the water supply and its quality.
Communicate to the donor alternative preferences, e.g. if
a financial contribution would be more appropriate to
enable the equipment to be bought in the country in
which it will be used (so as to obtain after sales support).
Donor responsibilities
Communicate with the recipient to obtain a comprehen-
sive description of the required equipment and its ex-
pected use. Advize the recipient whether the equipment
that can be supplied will be new or reconditioned. Provide
details of the model, year of manufacture, and estimated
lifespan of the equipment.
Supply equipment that is in full working order. Before
sending the equipment, test its performance and safety.
Do not supply worn-out, non-functioning, redundant, or
unsafe equipment.
Supply sufficient consumables and spare parts to last at
least two years (with the equipment or in stages appropri-
ate to their shelf-life). Include a complete list of spare
parts and provide the name and address of the authorized
dealer. Do not send equipment for which replacement
parts are unavailable or difficult to obtain.
Ensure the equipment is well packaged in a manageable
load(s). Include a full packing list.
EQUIPPING DISTRICT LABORATORIES 101
4.1
Use the correct procedure and documentation for trans-
porting the equipment. Airmail full copies of the docu-
mentation to the donor at the earliest opportunity (fax or
email copies in advance).
Find out about import regulations in the recipient’s
country and make sure that the recipient will be able to
pay the custom duties and any other import charges.
Offer as much technical assistance as possible, e.g. on-site
training for users of the equipment and maintenance
personnel.
Note: Above guidelines are based on those published in the
newsletter Contact
1
.
KEEPING EQUIPMENT IN WORKING
ORDER
While equipment design faults and the inappropri-
ate purchasing of equipment can lead to premature
equipment failure, the commonest causes for equip-
ment not working in district laboratories are:
incorrect use of equipment.
no one trained to take responsibility for the care
of the equipment and the implementation of
equipment standard operating procedures.
lack of the correct replacement parts.
no regular cleaning, inspection, and maintenance
of the equipment.
untrained personnel attempting unsuccessfully to
correct a fault or replace a component.
– damage to electrical equipment caused by
unstable power supplies, e.g. surge of current
when power is restored after a power failure, or
damage caused by lightning during storms (ex-
plained further in subunit 4.2).
Up to 70–90% of all equipment breakdowns are
caused by the users of equipment. Non-functioning
equipment represents not just a loss of important
laboratory services to patients and the community,
but also a waste of scarce health resources. As funds
to purchase equipment become more difficult to
obtain, the need to keep equipment operational and
increase its working life has never been greater.
Ways of keeping district laboratory
equipment operational
The following are effective ways of preventing
damage to equipment and keeping it operational:
Prepare written standard operating procedures
(SOPs) and other relevant information for each
item of equipment used in the laboratory, to
include:
– date equipment purchase d, name and
address of supplier, its cost, and details of the
model. e.g. serial number (usually written on
a plate on the back of the equipment).
how to operate the e quipment including
how to check its performance and calibrate it
before use.
how to clean the e quipment and inspect it
regularly, e.g. for corrosion, mechanical
damage, worn insulation, loose connections
in wall plug, etc.
relevant s afety instructions.
list of essential replacement parts, name of
supplier(s), how many of each should be
kept in stock, and code number to be
quoted when ordering.
how to maint ain the equipment (as rec-
ommended by the manufacturer) with a
checklist of what needs to be done and
when, and a maintenance-job sheet on
which to record the date of the maintenance,
activities performed, and person who carried
out the maintenance.
name and address of authorize d repairer
and dated records of repairs to the equip-
ment.
Ensure the person in charge of the laboratory:
is sufficiently well traine d to apply equipment
SOPs.
monitors whether e quipment is being used,
cleaned, and looked after correctly.
reminds st aff of the price and clinical value of
equipment (a label attached to the equip-
ment showing its price in local currency can
help to remind users of its cost).
Locate the equipment in a safe and secure place
where it cannot be easily damaged or stolen.
Always follow the manufacturer’s guidelines
regarding installation and ventilation require-
ments. Use a qualified electrician to assist in the
installation of electrical equipment.
If a fault develops or a component fails, immedi-
ately stop using the equipment. Investigate the
fault or replace the component only if qualified
to do so. Make sure the replacement part is
correct.
Report as soon as possible any damage to equip-
ment or fault that cannot be easily put right. The
district laboratory coordinator should investigate
102 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
4.1
promptly any report of equipment breakdown or
damage, and arrange for the repair as soon as
possible.
Important: When damaged equipment is re-
paired it should not be put back into operation
until measures are taken to prevent it becoming
damaged again.
Keep equipment clean and protect it:
from corrosion and fungal growth, e.g. by
sealing a microscope when not in use for
several days in a plastic bag containing self-
indicating anhydrous silica gel (reusable after
drying).
from inse ct damage e.g. by covering, but not
blocking, ventilation grills with appropriate
wire mesh.
Importance of a laboratory equipment
preventive maintenance programme
A well organized preventive maintenance pro-
gramme for laboratory equipment is essential.
The important benefits of having effective
maintenance are summarized by WHO as:
2
Greater safety by preventing hazards result-
ing from breakdowns.
Less unexpected shut-down time.
Improved performance with regard to stan-
dard requirements.
Less need for major repairs and lower repair
costs with the elimination of premature
replacement.
Improved effectiveness of laboratory equip-
ment with diminishing cost of tests.
Identification of equipment with high main-
tenance costs (and performance problems).
Improved equipment selection and
purchase policy.
Other important benefits include:
Less waste of reagents and control materials
and less time spent repeating tests.
Improved relationships between the labora-
tory and those requesting tests as services
are maintained and fewer test results are
delayed.
The ability to communicate more informa-
tively with manufacturers regarding what
equipment is needed and its specifications.
from dust and dirt by covering the e quip-
ment when not in use with a clean thick
cotton cloth (avoid plastic if in high humidity
areas).
from rodent damage by inspe cting the lab-
oratory regularly and taking immediate
action if there is evidence of infestation.
National equipment workshops and training centres
In recent years an increasing number of developing
countries have formulated health care equipment
policies and established centres or departments in
polytechnical colleges for repairing equipment and
training biomedical equipment engineers. Such
national centres and workshops can usually provide
equipment users with information on how to select
appropriate equipment and how to set up equip-
ment preventive maintenance programmes. To find
out more about the existence of such centres,
readers should contact their Ministry of Health.
Further information on the selection of equipment for
district laboratories: Readers are referred to the
publication Selection of basic laboratory equipment
for laboratories with limited resources (see
Recommended Reading).
4.2 Power Supplies in district
laboratories
In developing countries, district laboratories are
often without a mains electricity supply or receive
electricity for only a few hours each evening from an
on-site generator. The use of a generator enables
rechargeable batteries to be used to power essential
laboratory equipment.
Even when a laboratory is served by AC mains
electricity, the supply may be intermittent and sub-
ject to voltage fluctuations. Significant and sudden
increases in voltage (spikes and surges), e.g. when
mains supplies are restored following a power
failure, can damage equipment that is not voltage
protected. Significant reductions in voltage (sags or
brown-outs) e.g. when the electrical system
becomes overloaded, can affect the performance of
equipment such as centrifuges, colorimeters, spec-
trophotometers, electrophoresis equipment, and pH
EQUIPPING DISTRICT LABORATORIES 103
4.1–4.2
meters. Some microprocessor-controlled equipment
are programmed to cut out when voltage fluctua-
tions become greater than the built in voltage
tolerance, e.g. 10%.
Damage to equipment by lightning
Lightning may damage electrical equipment and
also injure the operator. Whenever there is an elec-
trical storm, electrical equipment should not be used
and electrical plugs should be disconnected from
wall sockets (and kept 30 cm from the sockets).
Terminology: Electrical terms used in this subunit are defined
at the end of the subunit.
Voltage protection devices
When mains AC electrical supplies are unreliable,
unprotected electrical equipment can be used with
a voltage protection device such as:
A voltage protection unit which cuts off the
power supply to the equipment when the volt-
age is significantly increased (usually over 260 V)
or decreased (usually below 190 V). Power is
restored to the equipment when the voltage
returns to acceptable levels. The equipment
plugs into the voltage protection unit which is in-
serted in the wall socket. Such a device is the
least expensive way of protecting equipment
from damage due to major voltage fluctuations.
A voltage stabilizer (surge suppressor plus filter)
which regulates the voltage supply so that equip-
ment is not damaged particularly by voltage
spikes and surges. Although more expensive
than a voltage protection unit, a voltage stabiliz-
er is recommended when mains electricity sup-
plies are subject to frequent major changes in
voltage. The cost of a stabilizer will depend on its
output power, i.e. volt ampere (VA) rating.
An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) on line
unit which in addition to regulating the voltage
output in a similar way to a voltage stabilizer, also
provides power for a limited period (from a bat-
tery) when a mains power failure occurs. This
may be sufficient time to complete tests, e.g. -
microscopy, colorimetric tests, or centrifuging
samples. Like a voltage stabilizer, a UPS is
costed by its VA rating.
Note: Further information on how to protect
equipment against power surges and power cuts
can be found in the publication Selection of basic
equipment for laboratories with limited resources (see
Recommended Reading).
Important: Always consult a qualified electrician or
biomedical equipment engineer regarding power
supply problems. Before purchasing electrical equip-
ment, ask what is its nominal voltage and level of
input voltage variation that the equipment can
tolerate.
Handy Mains inverter
The 200 Watt Handy Mains inverter unit SM 2716,
manufactured by Switched Mode Ltd converts DC
battery voltage to European mains level voltage and
can be used to power some low power consumption
240 V mains electrical laboratory equipment from a
12 V DC lead-acid battery e.g. microscope fitted with
a 6 V 10 W or 6 V 20 W lamp (see subunit 4.3) or
small bench brushed motor variable speed cen-
trifuge having a consumption power of 100 Watt
(see subunit 4.7). It is not suitable for high power
consumption equipment such as water baths, heat
blocks, etc. Always seek the advice of a qualified
electrician before using any equipment with the
Handy Mains inverter. The unit is shown in Plate 4.1.
Important: When used to power equipment in the
laboratory the 200 Watt Handy Mains inverter must
be used with a residual current device (RCD) safety
adaptor (power breaking trip) of the type No. 184-
3842.
104 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
4.2
The SM 2716 unit has a 12 V input voltage and is
supplied with red and black leads for attachment to
a 12V lead-acid battery. It has an output voltage of
240 VAC via a standard 13 A socket. When used in
the laboratory the RCD safety adaptor plugs into the
13 A socket of the inverter and the three pin plug of
the equipment plugs into the socket of the RCD
adaptor. There is a switch on the unit to enable the
output to be turned on and off without disconnect-
ing the unit from the battery. At the end of the day’s
work the unit must be disconnected from the bat-
tery and the equipment unplugged.
The Handy Mains 2716 inverter is fitted with an
audible warning that sounds when the battery is
becoming excessively discharged. The tone begins
to sound at around 10.5 V DC and it becomes
louder until the unit turns off at around 9.5 V DC to
protect the battery (removing the battery connection
to the adaptor resets the inverter).
Caution: High voltages exist inside the SM 2716 in-
verter. It should be treated in the same way as a
mains electricity supply. The inverter must not be
opened by the user, only by a qualified electrician,
e.g. should a fuse need to be replaced. No one
should open the unit until it has been disconnected
from the battery for at least 2 hours. Lethal voltages
may persist inside the inverter for up to 2 hours after
disconnection. Before using the SM 2716 read c are-
fully the information that accompanies the unit.
Consult a qualified electrician if any part of the
manufacturer’s literature is not understood, particu-
larly the safety aspects.
Availability of SM2716 and RCD 184-3842
The 200 W Handy Mains SM 2716 inverter and RCD safety
adaptor No 184-3842 (must be used with the inverter in the
laboratory) are available from Durbin plc (see Appendix 11).
The SM 2716 inverter has a Durbin catalogue number ER 092
01L and the RCD safety adaptor, catalogue number ER 092
02L.
Further technical information relating to the SM2716 inverter
Input voltage: 11–15 VDC continuous, 10 –18 VDC for 10
seconds. No load current, 0.4 A typical.
Output voltage:240 V AC rms nominal, 216–255 V AC over-
load range up to 1.1 A. The output voltage in stepped square
waveform, quasi sine wave. Output is by a BS1363 13 A UK
socket.
Output power: The SM 2716 unit has an output power of
250W short term with a surge capability of up to 500 W and
continuous power availability of 200 W.
USE OF BATTERIES
Laboratory equipment that can operate from a DC
supply using rechargeable batteries is particularly
useful in areas where mains AC electricity supplies
Plate 4.1 SM 2716 Switched Mode 200 Watt Handy Mains
Invertershowing cable and clips for attachment to a 12 V lead-
acid battery.
are restricted but sufficient for a mains charger to be
used to recharge a 12 volt lead-acid battery or
rechargeable nickel-cadmium batteries. In develop-
ing countries lead-acid batteries are more available
and affordable.
In areas where there is no mains AC electricity
supply, it may be appropriate to use solar (photo-
voltaic) energy to recharge 12 V batteries.
EQUIPPING DISTRICT LABORATORIES 105
4.2
is removed and replaced daily, the capacity of bat-
tery required can be calculated as follows:
88 Ah
i.e. a battery of capacity 100 Ah would be suitable.
Note: If able to use a deep cycle 12 V lead-acid bat-
tery that can be discharged to 50% of its capacity
(see later text), the size of battery required would be
35 Ah
In practice the available capacity of a battery de-
pends on the type of battery, its age and condition,
and particularly the discharge current i.e. how
quickly the battery is used. Both battery efficiency
and available capacity are reduced as the discharge
current is increased. At lower rates of discharge
(C/10 to C/100), efficiency is around 90% whereas at
higher rates of discharge (C/1 to C/5), efficiency falls
to around 60%.
The capacity of a lead-acid battery is also affected
by temperature. At higher temperatures a battery
holds more charge. Over about 40°C, however,
battery life is reduced.
Note: Full performance specifications of lead-acid
batteries are provided by manufacturers.
Using and maintaining 12 V lead-acid
batteries
Understanding how a lead-acid battery works,
selecting the most suitable type, and using it cor-
rectly are important for the reliable performance of
12 V DC equipment, and for maximizing the life of
the battery, and preventing battery related accidents.
How a 12 V lead-acid battery works
Most 12 V lead-acid storage batteries consist of six lead acid-
cells joined in series to produce direct current. Each cell con-
tains negative lead (Pb) electrode plates and positive lead
dioxide (PbO
2
) plates immersed in an electrolyte solution of
sulphuric acid (H
2
SO
4
) having a relative specific gravity of
1.240 (tropical specification).
During discharge, i.e. when the battery is being used, elec-
tricity is generated by the electrochemical reactions that take
place between the lead plates and the sulphuric acid. Part of
the material of both plates is converted to lead sulphate
(PbSO
4
) and the concentration of the electrolyte is reduced as
the sulphuric acid is used and water is produced.
During recharge, a battery charger forces electrons
through the battery in a direction opposite to that of the dis-
charge process. This reverses the chemical reactions, restoring
the electrolyte concentration and electrode materials to their
original form.
Battery cycle and depth of discharge
One discharge and charge period is referred to as a
battery cycle. A major factor affecting battery life is
212 10 0

12 50
212 10 0

12 20
Calculating energy requirement of equipment
and capacity of battery needed
The electrical requirement of equipment (power
rating) in watt-hours (Wh) per day is calculated as
follows:
Power of equipment (W) Expected daily use (h)
Wh/day
The power rating in watts of equipment will usually
be written on a plate or label on the back of the
equipment or given in the User Manual. If only the
volts (V) and amps (A) are given, multiply V A to
obtain wattage (W).
Examples from a district laboratory
To calculate the Wh/day for two microscopes each with a
rating of 10 W and being used for a total of 8 hours each
day:
2 10 8 160 Wh
To calculate the Wh/day for a centrifuge with a rating of
96 W and being used for a total of 0.5 hours each day (i.e.
ten times for 3 minutes):
96 0.5 48 Wh
To calculate the Wh/day for a colorimeter with a rating of
2 W and being used for a total of 2 hours each day:
2 2 4 Wh
Using the above examples the total Wh for the load
i.e. all the equipment, is 160 48 4 212 Wh
To power this equipment, using a 12 V lead-acid
battery from which no more than 20% of its energy
Efficient, cost effective, and safe use of
equipment from a battery
Achieved by:
Using low energy consumption equipment
and a battery system of adequate capacity.
Selecting a battery that can withstand deep
discharging.
Controlling the discharge and charge cycle
of the battery.
Maintaining the battery correctly.
Being aware of the hazards involved,
particularly when using 12 V lead-acid
batteries.
depth of discharge, i.e. how much the battery is dis-
charged and how often. The depth of discharge of a
battery is a measure in percentage of the amount of
energy which can be removed from a battery dur-
ing a cycle. Limiting the depth of discharge will
make the battery last longer. If discharged beyond
its recommended depth of discharge, the life of a
battery will be considerably reduced. The state of
discharge of a battery can be measured using a volt-
meter or reading the specific gravity of the
electrolyte in the cells.
To power 12 V ele ctrical laboratory equipment,
a battery that can be deeply discharged is rec-
ommended,i.e. deepcycle battery.This typeof battery
is designed to have 40–80% of its charge removed
andrepeatedly replaced 1 000–2000 times.
In developing countries, true deep cycling 12V
lead-acid batteriesare usually available only from the
suppliers of photovolt aic equipment. Other 12 V
lead-acid batteries with some of the featuresof de ep
cycle batteries may be obtainable locally as port able
‘solar’(improved vehicle) batteries, monobloctraction
or semi-traction motive batteries (e.g. for powering
wheelchairs), and batteries used for leisureactivities.
Note: Whenever possible avoid using shallow
discharge 12 V lead-acid vehicle (automotive)
batteries that have thin plates. They are not designed
for stationary use but for supplying a heavy current
for a short period followed by immediate recharge
from a running vehicle. If such a battery has to be
used, no more than 20% of its charge should be re-
moved. It should be charged as soon as possible
after discharge, and not overcharged.
Sealed and low maintenance 12 V lead-acid batteries
Sealed batteries are commonly available for use in vehicles
but deep cycle sealed gel (captive electrolyte) and absorptive
electrolyte type batteries are also obtainable but expensive.
Sealed batteries do not leak or spill and require no topping up
of electrolyte. They are therefore easily transported and suit-
able for powering portable equipment.
Compared with vented 12 V lead-acid batteries, sealed
12 V batteries have a shorter life and their discharge and
charge cycle require more careful control. A special regulated
charger matched to the battery must be used to avoid damage
from overcharging. A sealed battery cannot be supplied dry-
charged and therefore there is risk of the battery being dam-
aged should it have to be stored or is held in customs for
several weeks before it can be charged. Self-discharge will be
rapid in temperatures over 40°C.
What are referred to as low maintenance 12 V lead-acid
batteries are also available which require little or no mainten-
ance if discharged and charged correctly. Unlike a sealed bat-
tery, the vent caps can be removed to check the level and
density of the electrolyte.
Correct and safe use of vented 12 V lead-acid
batteries
Read the manufacturer’s information and in-
106 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
4.2
structions supplied with the battery. If the battery
is supplied dry-charged, i.e. without the elec-
trolyte added, follow carefully the instructions for
filling it with electrolyte.
Caution: The electrolyte in lead-acid batteries is a
sulphuric acid solution. It is highly corrosive and
dangerous. When making a solution of the acid,
add the acid to the water, NEVER ADD WATER
TO CONCENTRATED SULPHURIC ACID.
Wear chemical resistant gloves and protect the
eyes, face, and clothing from acid burns (see First
Aid, subunit 3.8).
Where to locate a 12 V lead-acid battery
Store the battery upright in a secure and dry
place, protected from direct sunlight, rain, dew,
and excessive dust. Place the battery in a special
wooden ventilated battery box or on a block of
wood, not directly on the floor, particularly a
cement floor.
Make sure the area is well ventilated and kept
free from naked flames e.g. from Bunsen
burners, matches, lighted tapers. Display ‘No
Smoking’ notices.
Caution: During charging, hydrogen is evolved
which can be explosive if allowed to build-up in
a non-ventilated place.
Connecting and disconnecting the battery
Connect the leads to a battery correctly, i.e. posi-
tive () lead to the positive terminal (often
coloured red), and the negative () lead to the
negative terminal (often coloured black or blue).
Do not allow the lead from one terminal to touch
the opposite terminal.
Whenever possible use secure clamped battery
connections and special DC wall power sockets.
Before disconnecting a battery, turn off the
equipment the battery is powering.
When disconnecting, always remove one lead at
a time and DO NOT ALLOW the positive and
negative leads or connections to touch. Touching
will cause a dangerous shorting between the ter-
minals.
When in use, make sure the lead from one bat-
tery terminal does not lie across the opposite
terminal as this will cause the lead to burn.
Shorting between battery terminals.
When an accidental connection is made between the positive
and negative terminals of a battery, a path of low resistance is
created through which a dangerously high current of elec-
tricity can flow which can cause burning, fire, and even explo-
sion of the battery. Users of batteries must be aware of this
serious hazard.
Caution: As a safety precaution, before touching a
battery, always remove any metal objects from the
hands, wrists, and neck such as watch straps or
jewellery. Also remove metal spatulas and scissors
etc, that may fall out of pockets. If using a tool, make
sure it has an insulated handle. Never leave metal
objects on top of a battery.
Maintenance
To prevent tracking of electricity on the surface of
a battery between terminals, keep the top of the
battery dry and dirt-free. Tracking can be
dangerous and will increase the self-discharge of
a battery.
To prevent corrosion of the battery terminals and
connections, lightly coat the metal surfaces with
petroleum grease, e.g. vaseline (do not use oil). If
corrosion forms, clean it off using a weak solution
of sodium bicarbonate, i.e. about 5 g dissolved in
50 ml of water. Wear rubber gloves and eye pro-
tection. Wash off the neutralized acid with water,
dry, and apply vaseline to the metal surfaces.
Inspect regularly (at least once a week) the level
of electrolyte in each cell of the battery. The
correct level is the top of the level indicator
(normally marked). For most 12 V DC vented
batteries the electrolyte level should be 9–12
mm above the plates but read the manufac-
turer’s instructions.
If the level of the electrolyte is below that rec-
ommended, top it up using deionized or distilled
water (from a non-metallic container) or special
‘battery water’ available from most garages. Do
not overfill as this will cause the electrolyte to
overflow during charging. Topping up should be
carried out when the battery is fully charged.
Important: Never use tap water to top up a bat-
tery as this will contain impurities that will alter
the electrolyte and seriously reduce the efficiency
and life of the battery. If the level of electrolyte is
consistently low, as shown by excessive gassing
(bubbling), this indicates that the battery is being
overcharged.
Charging and discharging
Donot t ake more energyout of a battery than is
recommended. As previously explained, permis-
sible depth of discharge will depend on the type
ofbattery (up to 50% canb eremoved from deep
cycle batteries but only up to 20% from vehicle
batteries). The state of chargeof a battery should
be checked weekly and its depth of discharge
controlled to maximize the life of the battery.
EQUIPPING DISTRICT LABORATORIES 107
4.2
To check the depth of discharge, measure the
density (specific gravity) of the electrolyte using a
battery hydrometer or the voltage of the battery
using a voltmeter.
Note: The more a battery is discharged, the
more dilute the sulphuric acid becomes and the
lower will be the specific gravity reading. Voltage
also decreases as a battery is being discharged.
Measuring the specific gravity is more accurate
than measuring the voltage when determining
the state of charge of a vented lead-acid battery
and its individual cells.
Interpretation of specific gravity (SG) results for tropical
countries
SG 1.230100% charge SG 1.16150% charge
1.216090% 1.14740%
1.203080% 1.13430%
1.189070% 1.12020%
1.175060%
Recharge a battery as soon as possible after dis-
charge. NEVER leave a battery for a long period
in a discharged state because the plates will
become permanently damaged. Make sure the
area is well ventilated as hydrogen gas is evolved
during charging.
Avoid using a rapid charge at high current as this
can damage the battery. Do not charge at a cur-
rent that is more than one tenth of the rated
capacity of the battery. Ideally, charge batteries
up to 90 Ah at 3–4 A and higher rated batteries
at 5–7 A.
Use a regulate d taper charger. This will ensure
the current decreases (tapers down) as the
chargeprogresses. It will prevent thetemperature
of the ele ctrolyte rising as the battery becomes
charged. If the temperature rises to above 38°C,
stop charging and wait until the electrolyte cools.
Charging is complete when the cells are bub-
bling (gassing) freely.
Important: Repeated overcharging of a battery
causes evaporation of the electrolyte and corrosion
of the plates which will result in rapid failure of the
battery. The charging, particularly of sealed batteries,
must be carefully controlled and the correct type of
charger used. A battery should not be discharged
and charged more than once in 24 hours.
Self-discharge: A 12 V lead-acid battery in good con-
dition will not self-discharge more than about 5%
per month. An old battery in poor condition can lose
up to 40% of its capacity per month if not charged
regularly and kept clean and its surface dry.
Charging from solar panels: When charging a 12V
lead-acid battery from a solar panel, a voltage
regulator must be used. Advice on the use of
photovoltaic (PV) energy can be obtained from the
organization FAKT and Healthlink Worldwide (see
Appendix 11).
Nickel-cadmium rechargeable batteries
Nickel-cadmium (NiCd or nicads) are available as:
Small-capacity sealed batteries (similar in sizes to
non-rechargeable dry batteries), e.g. AA size of
300–700 mAh, up to D size of 4000 mAh
(4 Ah) and 5 Ah.
High capacity NiCd batteries suitable for use in
photovoltaic systems.
While sealed NiCd batteries are commonly available,
higher capacity NiCd batteries are difficult to obtain
particularly in developing countries. They are con-
siderably more expensive than lead-acid batteries
but last much longer (up to 20 years).
Important characteristics of vented NiCd batteries
Compared with lead-acid batteries, vented NiCd
batteries have several important advantages:
they can be fully discharged (100% depth of dis-
charge) and left discharged without becoming
damaged.
can withstand overcharging.
loss of electrolyte is low and therefore topping up
is required only occasionally.
for a given load, the capacity of a NiCd battery
can be lower than that needed when using a
lead-acid battery (because of its 100% depth of
discharge).
when used in a PV system, a voltage regulator is
not required.
Correct use of sealed NiCd batteries
NiCd batteries do not always function reliably in
tropical climates. To maximize the cell life and
capacity of sealed NiCd batteries:
Allow the batteries to discharge completely
before recharging them (do not ‘top up’ the
charge between use).
Recharge close to the time of use in a cool dry
place because sealed NiCd batteries rapidly lose
their charge during storage particularly in hot
humid tropical conditions.
Use a NiCd charger of the correct capacity and
voltage for the batteries being charged. Charge
slowly and fully.
108 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
4.2
Store recharged batteries (few days only) in a
cool dry place, preferably in a refrigerator in a
sealed box containing a desiccant.
Note: Further information on the use of batteries
and solar energy can be found in the publication
Selection of basic laboratory equipment for labora-
tories with limited resources (see Recommended
Reading).
Meaning of electrical terms used in this subunit
Voltage: The electrical potential across any two points in a cir-
cuit, measured in volts (V). It is the ‘push’ that makes the elec-
tric current flow around a circuit. In Europe and many
countries AC supplies are at 220–240 V, whereas in USA and
a few other countries, consumer supplies are at 110 V.
Spike: Instantaneous dramatic increase in voltage.
Surge: Short-term increase in voltage
Sag: (brownout): Short-term decrease in voltage levels.
Current: The amount of electricity flowing through any wire
or other conductor measured in amperes, or amps (A). There
are 1000 milliamps (mA) in 1 amp. The current may be alter-
nating current (AC) or direct current (DC). If watts (W) and
volts (V) are known, amps (A) can be calculated: A .
Alternating current (AC or a.c.): Electric current in which the
direction of flow changes rapidly all the time.
Frequency: The number of complete cycles per second of an
AC supply measured in hertz (Hz), e.g. 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
Phase: The ‘live’ connections in an AC supply. Three phase
supplies are used by large industrial and commercial con-
sumers. Single phase supplies are used for smaller domestic
consumers. A single phase will be found in most laboratories
fitted with wall sockets.
Direct current (DC or d.c.): Electric current in which the
direction of the current does not reverse but remains the
same, from the positive to the negative as in a battery system.
Transformer: An AC device which converts power at one
voltage to another e.g. 240 V to 110 V or vice versa.
Inverter: Device that can convert the DC stored in batteries
to mains voltage AC current, enabling mains electrical equip-
ment to be used with a 12 V battery.
Electrical power: Refers to how much work the electricity
can do, i.e. the rate of delivery or use of electrical energy. It is
measured in watts (W) and is calculated as follows:
Power (W) Voltage (V) Current (A), i.e. W V A.
There are 1000 W in 1 kilowatt (kW).
Electrical energy: Refers to the total amount of electricity
produced or used in a given period. It is measured in watt-
hours (Wh) and is calculated as follows:
Energy (Wh) Power (W) Time (hours).
There are 1000 Wh in 1 kilowatt hour (kWh).
Battery capacity in Ah: The total number of amp-hours (Ah)
that can be removed from a fully charged battery at a speci-
fied discharge rate.
W
V
4.3 Microscope
A microscope is the most expensive and important
piece of equipment used in district laboratories.
Microscopy forms 70–90% of the work.
EQUIPPING DISTRICT LABORATORIES 109
4.3
further the magnification will reveal no more detail
but only an image that is more highly magnified and
increasingly blurred.
Note: The range of total magnifications within which details in
the object are seen clearly in the image (useful magnification)
is usually taken as between 500 and 1000 times the numerical
aperture of the objective (see following text).
Resolving and defining power of an objective
An objective accepts light leaving the specimen over
a wide angle and recombines the diverging rays to
form a point-for-point image of the specimen.
Objectives of varying magnifications allow a speci-
men to be examined in broad detail over a wide
area, and in increasing detail over a smaller area.
This increase in magnifying power is always
linked to an increase in resolving power. The higher
the resolving power of an objective, the closer can
be the fine lines or small dots in the specimen which
the objective can separate in the image.
The resolving power of an objective is therefore
of great importance. It is dependent on what is
known as the numerical aperture (NA) of the objec-
tive. The NA of an objective is an exact figure that
has been worked out mathematically from its equiv-
alent focal length and lens diameter. It is not necess-
ary to know the details of this calculation. Both the
NA and magnification of an objective are usually en-
graved on it. The following are the usual NAs of
commonly used objectives:
10objective NA 0.25
20objective 0.45
40objective 0.65
100 (oil) objective 1.25
Working of an oil immersion objective
When a beam of light passes from air into glass it is
bent and when it passes back from glass to air it is
bent back again to its original direction. This has little
effect on low power objectives but with high power
lenses this bending limits not only the amount of
light which can enter the lens but also affects the NA
of the objective and consequently its resolving
power.
The bending effect and its limitations on the ob-
jective can be avoided by replacing the air between
the specimen and the lens with an oil which has the
same optical properties as glass, i.e. immersion oil.
When the correct oil is used, the light passes in a
straight line from glass through the oil and back to
glass as though it were passing through glass all the
way (see Fig. 4.1). By collecting extra oblique light,
the oil provides better resolution and a brighter
image. Some 50objectives and all 100 obje c-
tives are used immersed in oil.
Microscopy in district laboratories
malaria paragonimiasis
trypanosomiasis tub erculosis
leishmaniasis leprosy
onchocerciasis meningitis
lymphatic filariasis gonorrhoea (male)
loiasis cholera
schistosomiasis urinary tract infections
amoebiasis trichomoniasis
giardiasis vaginal candidiasis
cryptosporidiosis red cells in anaemia
intestinal worm white cell changes
infections skin mycoses
WORKING PRINCI PLE OF A MICROSCOPE
A microscope is a magnifying instrument. The mag-
nified image of the object (specimen) is first
produced by a lens close to the object called the
objective. This collects light from the specimen and
forms the primary image. A second lens near the
eye called the eyepiece enlarges the primary image,
converting it into one that can enter the pupil of the
eye.
The magnification of the objective multiplied by
that of the eyepiece, gives the total magnification of
the image seen in microscopes having a mechanical
tube length (MTL) of 160 mm. The MTL is the
distance between the shoulder of an objective and
the rim of the eyepiece.
Examples
Objective Eyepiece Total
magnification magnification magnification
010 10 0100 diameters
040 10 0400 diameters
100 10 1000 diameters
Useful magnification
The objective provides all the detail available in the
image. The eyepiece makes the detail large enough
to be seen but provides no information not already
present in the primary image formed by the objec-
tive. The magnification of eyepiece used should
therefore be adequate to enable the relevant detail
in the primary image to be seen clearly. Increasing
In tropical climates the use of synthetic
non-drying immersion oil is recommended.
Chromatic and spherical aberrations
How well an objective is able to define outlines clearly and
distinctly depends on how perfectly it has been corrected for
chromatic and spherical aberrations. Chromatic aberration is
when a biconvex lens splits white light into its component
colours and blue light is magnified slightly more than red light
so that it comes to a focus nearer to the lens. Spherical
aberration is caused by the edge of a lens giving
a slightly higher magnification than its centre.
Manufacturers of objectives are able to correct for chro-
matic and spherical aberrations by combining lenses of differ-
ent dispersive powers. In recent years a new concept of
correction has been developed which includes the entire
imaging system as a unit and is referred to as the chromatic-
free, or CF system.
Achromats
Achromatic objectives, or achromats, are the most
widely used of objectives. In most achromats, chro-
matic aberrations are corrected for two wavelengths
and spherical aberrations are corrected for one
wavelength.
Semi-apochromats (fluorite objectives) and
apochromats
These objectives are corrected for three wavelengths
chromatically and two spherically. They are con-
siderably more expensive than achromats and only
required for specialized work. Apochromats have
high NAs and therefore the image they produce is
sharper but only in focus in the central part of the
field due to field curvature. The correct thickness of
coverglass must be used. Compensating eyepieces
need to be used with apochromats.
Illumination system of the microscope
An adequate, well-aligned, and controllable illumi-
nation system is required for good microscopy. This
can be achieved by using a microscope with built-in
illumination. Whenever possible daylight illumi-
110 DISTRICT LABORATORYPRACTICE IN TROPICAL COUNTRIES
4.3
nation should be avoided because it is variable,
difficult to use, and rarely adequate for oil immersion
work.
A substage condenser is used to collect, control,
andfocus light onthe object. It projectsa cone oflight
matching the NA of the objective, controlled by the
iris diaphragm. It also projects an image of the light
source onto the specimen. The light should just fill
the fieldof view of the eyepiece and back lens of the
objective uniformly or theimage will not be good.
It is particularly important to avoid glare and
reflections in the microscope and to adjust the con-
denser aperture correctly for each objective and
when examining different specimens. To check for
glare, the eyepiece can be removed and the inside
of the microscope tube inspected. Glare is present if
the inside of the tube is illuminated.
How to minimize glare
Glare in the microscope is caused by any light reach-
ing the eye which does not go to make up the per-
fect image but interferes with it and the ability of the
objective to distinguish detail in a specimen.
The following are the most practical ways of
reducing glare in routine work:
Position a microscope with built-in illumination in
subdued light, not in front of a window. When
this cannot be done, an eyeshade can help to
exclude external glare.
Avoid using a larger source of illumination than
is necessary. If using an adjustable light source,
adjust the light to illuminate no more than the
field of view.
Reduce condenser glare by reducing the con-
denser aperture, i.e. adjusting the iris diaphragm,
when using low power objectives. This will
increase contrast but with some loss of resolving
power which is unavoidable.
Some kinds of specimen give more glare than
others. A stained blood film or bacterial smear with
no cover glass and examined with the oil immersion
objective gives little glare and should therefore be
examined always with the condenser iris wide open.
Unstained particles suspended in water or
physiological saline under a cover glass and exam-
ined with the 10objective, give considerable glare.
Preparations such as cerebrospinal fluid, urine, or
wet unstained faecal preparations require examin-
ation with the condenser iris considerably reduced.
Tungsten and halogen illumination
A quartz halogen illumination is preferred to a tung-
sten illumination because it gives a consistent bright
Light being lost
through bending
Front lens
of objective
Glass
slide
AIR
AIROIL
Fig. 4.1 Working principle of an oil immersion objective.